// ============================== // CONTENTS // ============================== // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX - BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_ENABLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETCHECK - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_getcheck(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETSTATE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_getstate(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETTEXTLENGTH - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETCHECK - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_setcheck(HWND hwndCtl, int check) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETSTATE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_setstate(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL state) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETSTYLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_setstyle(HWND hwndCtl, DWORD style, BOOL fRedraw) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ADDITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_additemdata(HWND hwndCtl, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ADDSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_addstring(HWND hwndCtl, LPCTSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_DELETESTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_deletestring(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_DIR - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_dir(HWND hwndCtl, UINT attrs, LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ENABLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_finditemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_findstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_findstringexact(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETCOUNT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getcount(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETCURSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getcursel(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getdroppedcontrolrect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDSTATE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getdroppedstate(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETEXTENDEDUI - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getextendedui(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getitemheight(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getlbtext(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCTSTR lpszBuffer) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXTLEN - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getlbtextlen(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETTEXTLENGTH - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_INSERTITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_insertitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_INSERTSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_insertstring(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_LIMITTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_limittext(HWND hwndCtl, int cchLimit) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_RESETCONTENT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_resetcontent(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SELECTITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_selectitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SELECTSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_selectstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszSelect) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETCURSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setcursel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETEXTENDEDUI - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setextendedui(HWND hwndCtl, UINT flags) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setitemheight(HWND hwndCtl, int index, int cyItem) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SHOWDROPDOWN - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_showdropdown(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fShow) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_DELETEFONT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_deletefont(HFONT hfont) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_CANUNDO - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_canundo(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_emptyundobuffer(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_ENABLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_FMTLINES - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_fmtlines(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fAddEOL) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getfirstvisibleline(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETHANDLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_gethandle(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETLINE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getline(HWND hwndCtl, int line, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETLINECOUNT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getlinecount(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETMODIFY - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getmodify(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETPASSWORDCHAR - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getpasswordchar(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETRECT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getrect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getsel(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETTEXTLENGTH - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETWORDBREAKPROC - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getwordbreakproc(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LIMITTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_limittext(HWND hwndCtl, int cchMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINEFROMCHAR - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_linefromchar(HWND hwndCtl, int ich) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINEINDEX - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_lineindex(HWND hwndCtl, int line) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINELENGTH - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_linelength(HWND hwndCtl, int line) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_REPLACESEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_replacesel(HWND hwndCtl, LPCTSTR lpszReplace) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SCROLL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_scroll(HWND hwndCtl, int dv, int dh) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SCROLLCARET - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_scrollcaret(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETHANDLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_sethandle(HWND hwndCtl, HLOCAL h) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETMODIFY - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setmodify(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fModified) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETPASSWORDCHAR - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setpasswordchar(HWND hwndCtl, UINT ch) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETREADONLY - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setreadonly(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fReadOnly) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETRECT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setrect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETRECTNOPAINT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setrectnopaint(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setsel(HWND hwndCtl, int ichStart, int ichEnd) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETTABSTOPS - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_settabstops(HWND hwndCtl, int cTabs, int* lpTabs) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETWORDBREAKPROC - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setwordbreakproc(HWND hwndCtl, EDITWORDBREAKPROC lpfnWordBreak) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_UNDO - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_undo(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_GET_X_LPARAM - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_get_x_lparam(LPARAM lp) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_GET_Y_LPARAM - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_get_y_lparam(LPARAM lp) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ADDITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_additemdata(HWND hwndCtl, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ADDSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_addstring(HWND hwndCtl, LPCSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_DELETESTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_deletestring(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_DIR - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_dir(HWND hwndCtl, UINT attrs, LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ENABLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_finditemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_findstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_findstringexact(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCARETINDEX - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getcaretindex(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCOUNT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getcount(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCURSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getcursel(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gethorizontalextent(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getitemheight(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMRECT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getitemrect(HWND hwndCtl, int index, RECT* lprc) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getsel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSELCOUNT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getselcount(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSELITEMS - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getselitems(HWND hwndCtl, int cItems, int* lpItems) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCTSTR lpszBuffer) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTEXTLEN - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gettextlen(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTOPINDEX - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gettopindex(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_INSERTITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_insertitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_INSERTSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_insertstring(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_RESETCONTENT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_resetcontent(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELECTITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_selectitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELECTSTRING - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_selectstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELITEMRANGE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_selitemrange(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fSelect, int first, int last) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCARETINDEX - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setcaretindex(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCOLUMNWIDTH - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setcolumnwidth(HWND hwndCtl, int cxColumn) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCURSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setcursel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_sethorizontalextent(HWND hwndCtl, int cxExtent) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETITEMDATA - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setitemheight(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM cy) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETSEL - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setsel(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fSelect, int index) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETTABSTOPS - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_settabstops(HWND hwndCtl, int cTabs, int* lpTabs) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETTOPINDEX - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_settopindex(HWND hwndCtl, int indexTop) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_ENABLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_enable(HWND hwndCtl, UINT flags) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_GETPOS - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_getpos(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_GETRANGE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_getrange(HWND hwndCtl, int* lpposMin, int* lpposMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SETPOS - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_setpos(HWND hwndCtl, int pos, BOOL fRedraw) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SETRANGE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_setrange(HWND hwndCtl, int posMin, int posMax, BOOL fRedraw) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SHOW - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_show(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fShow) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SELECTFONT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_selectfont(HDC hdc, HFONT hfont) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_ENABLE - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETICON - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_geticon(HWND hwndCtl, HICON hIcon) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETTEXTLENGTH - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_SETICON - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_seticon(HWND hwndCtl, HICON hIcon) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_SETTEXT - void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX - END // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // REQUIREMENTS // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (2) // windows_h #ifndef _WINDOWS_ #include #endif // windowsx_h #ifndef _INC_WINDOWSX #include #endif // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (125) // Button_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_GetCheck() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_GetState() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_SetCheck() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_SetState() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_SetStyle() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Button_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_AddItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_AddString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_DeleteString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_Dir() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_FindItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_FindString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_FindStringExact() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetDroppedState() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetExtendedUI() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetLBText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetLBTextLen() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_InsertItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_InsertString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_LimitText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_ResetContent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SelectItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SelectString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SetExtendedUI() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ComboBox_ShowDropdown() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // DeleteFont() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // Edit_CanUndo() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_FmtLines() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetHandle() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetLine() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetLineCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetModify() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetPasswordChar() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_GetWordBreakProc() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_LimitText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_LineFromChar() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_LineIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_LineLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_ReplaceSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_Scroll() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_ScrollCaret() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetHandle() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetModify() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetPasswordChar() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetReadOnly() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetRectNoPaint() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetTabStops() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_SetWordBreakProc() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Edit_Undo() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // GET_X_LPARAM() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // GET_Y_LPARAM() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // ListBox_AddItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_AddString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_DeleteString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_Dir() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_FindItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_FindString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_FindStringExact() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetCaretIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetItemRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetSelCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetSelItems() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetTextLen() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_GetTopIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_InsertItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_InsertString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_ResetContent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SelectItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SelectString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SelItemRange() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetCaretIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetColumnWidth() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetTabStops() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ListBox_SetTopIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ScrollBar_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ScrollBar_GetPos() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ScrollBar_GetRange() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ScrollBar_SetPos() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ScrollBar_SetRange() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ScrollBar_Show() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // SelectFont() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // Static_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Static_GetIcon() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Static_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Static_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Static_SetIcon() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // Static_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== USING DATA_TYPES (17) // void // HWND // BOOL // LPTSTR // int // DWORD // LPARAM // LPCTSTR // UINT // RECT* // LPCSTR // HFONT // HLOCAL // int* // EDITWORDBREAKPROC // HDC // HICON // ============================== END // REQUIREMENTS // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX // ============================== ABOUT // Windows / Win32 / API / windowsx // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/ // ============================== DESCRIPTION // OVERVIEW // // OVERVIEW - BEGIN // windowsx.h header // // DEVELOPER_NOTES // WINDOWS_AND_MESSAGES // WINDOWS_CONTROLS // WINDOWS_GDI // // This header is used by multiple technologies. For more information, see: // * Developer Notes // * Windows and Messages // * Windows Controls // * Windows GDI // // windowsx.h contains the following programming interfaces: // // Functions // Button_Enable - Enables or disables a button. // Button_GetCheck - Gets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETCHECK message explicitly. // Button_GetState - Retrieves the state of a button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETSTATE message explicitly. // Button_GetText - Gets the text of a button. // Button_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of a button. // Button_SetCheck - Sets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETCHECK message explicitly. // Button_SetState - Sets the highlight state of a button. The highlight state indicates whether the button is highlighted as if the user had pushed it. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTATE message explicitly. // Button_SetStyle - Sets the style of a button. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTYLE message explicitly. // Button_SetText - Sets the text of a button. // ComboBox_AddItemData - Adds item data to the list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_AddString - Adds a string to a list in a combo box. // ComboBox_DeleteString - Deletes the item at the specified location in a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_Dir - Adds names to the list displayed by a combo box. // ComboBox_Enable - Enables or disables a combo box control. // ComboBox_FindItemData - Finds the first item in a combo box list that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_FindString - Finds the first string in a combo box list that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_FindStringExact - Finds the first string in a combo box list that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetCount - Gets the number of items in the list box of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetCurSel - Gets the index of the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect - Retrieves the screen coordinates of a combo box in its dropped-down state. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetDroppedState - Ascertains whether the drop list in a combo box control is visible. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDSTATE message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetExtendedUI - Ascertains whether a combo box is using the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetItemData - Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetItemHeight - Retrieves the height of list items in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetLBText - Gets a string from a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetLBTextLen - Gets the length of a string in the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetText - Retrieves the text from a combo box control. // ComboBox_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of a combo box. // ComboBox_InsertItemData - Inserts item data in a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_InsertString - Adds a string to a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_LimitText - Limits the length of the text the user may type into the edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // ComboBox_ResetContent - Removes all items from the list box and edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ComboBox_SelectItemData - Searches a list in a combo box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_SelectString - Searches a list in a combo box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetCurSel - Sets the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetExtendedUI - Selects either the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI for a combo box that has the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetItemData - Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetItemHeight - Sets the height of list items or the selection field in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetText - Sets the text of a combo box. // ComboBox_ShowDropdown - Shows or hides the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SHOWDROPDOWN message explicitly. // DeleteFont - The DeleteFont macro deletes a font object, freeing all system resources associated with the font object. // Edit_CanUndo - Determines whether there are any actions in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_CANUNDO message explicitly. // Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer - Resets the undo flag of an edit or rich edit control. The undo flag is set whenever an operation within the edit control can be undone. You can use this macro or send the EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER message explicitly. // Edit_Enable - Enables or disables an edit control. // Edit_FmtLines - Sets a flag that determines whether text retrieved from a multiline edit control includes soft line-break characters. // Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine - Gets the index of the uppermost visible line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE message explicitly. // Edit_GetHandle - Gets a handle to the memory currently allocated for the text of a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETHANDLE message explicitly. // Edit_GetLine - Retrieves a line of text from an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINE message explicitly. // Edit_GetLineCount - Gets the number of lines in the text of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINECOUNT message explicitly. // Edit_GetModify - Gets the state of an edit or rich edit control's modification flag. The flag indicates whether the contents of the control have been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETMODIFY message explicitly. // Edit_GetPasswordChar - Gets the password character for an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_GetRect - Gets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETRECT message explicitly. // Edit_GetSel - Gets the starting and ending character positions of the current selection in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETSEL message explicitly. // Edit_GetText - Gets the text of an edit control. // Edit_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of an edit control. // Edit_GetWordBreakProc - Retrieves the address of an edit or rich edit control's Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // Edit_LimitText - Limits the length of text that can be entered into an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // Edit_LineFromChar - Gets the index of the line that contains the specified character index in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEFROMCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_LineIndex - Gets the character index of the first character of a specified line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEINDEX message explicitly. // Edit_LineLength - Retrieves the length, in characters, of a line in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINELENGTH message explicitly. // Edit_ReplaceSel - Replaces the selected text in an edit control or a rich edit control with the specified text. You can use this macro or send the EM_REPLACESEL message explicitly. // Edit_Scroll - Scrolls the text vertically in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLL message explicitly. // Edit_ScrollCaret - Scrolls the caret into view in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLLCARET message explicitly. // Edit_SetHandle - Sets the handle of the memory that will be used by a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETHANDLE message explicitly. // Edit_SetModify - Sets or clears the modification flag for an edit control. The modification flag indicates whether the text within the edit control has been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETMODIFY message explicitly. // Edit_SetPasswordChar - Sets or removes the password character for an edit or rich edit control. When a password character is set, that character is displayed in place of the characters typed by the user. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_SetReadOnly - Sets or removes the read-only style (ES_READONLY) of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETREADONLY message explicitly. // Edit_SetRect - Sets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECT message explicitly. // Edit_SetRectNoPaint - Sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control. This macro is equivalent to Edit_SetRect, except that it does not redraw the edit control window. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECTNP message explicitly. // Edit_SetSel - Selects a range of characters in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETSEL message explicitly. // Edit_SetTabStops - Sets the tab stops in a multiline edit or rich edit control. When text is copied to the control, any tab character in the text causes space to be generated up to the next tab stop. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // Edit_SetText - Sets the text of an edit control. // Edit_SetWordBreakProc - Replaces an edit control's default Wordwrap function with an application-defined Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // Edit_Undo - Undoes the last operation in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_UNDO message explicitly. // GET_X_LPARAM - Retrieves the signed x-coordinate from the specified LPARAM value. // GET_Y_LPARAM - Retrieves the signed y-coordinate from the given LPARAM value. // ListBox_AddItemData - Adds item data to the list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_AddString - Adds a string to a list box. // ListBox_DeleteString - Deletes the item at the specified location in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_Dir - Adds names to the list displayed by a list box. // ListBox_Enable - Enables or disables a list box control. // ListBox_FindItemData - Finds the first item in a list box that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_FindString - Finds the first string in a list box that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_FindStringExact - Finds the first list box string that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetCaretIndex - Retrieves the index of the list box item that has the focus rectangle in a multiple-selection list box. The item may or may not be selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ListBox_GetCount - Gets the number of items in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetCurSel - Gets the index of the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent - Gets the width that a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width) if the list box has a horizontal scroll bar. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetItemData - Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ListBox_GetItemHeight - Retrieves the height of items in a list box. // ListBox_GetItemRect - Gets the dimensions of the rectangle that bounds a list box item as it is currently displayed in the list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetSel - Gets the selection state of an item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_GetSelCount - Gets the count of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELCOUNT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetSelItems - Gets the indexes of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELITEMS message explicitly. // ListBox_GetText - Gets a string from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetTextLen - Gets the length of a string in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ListBox_GetTopIndex - Gets the index of the first visible item in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ListBox_InsertItemData - Inserts item data to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_InsertString - Adds a string to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_ResetContent - Removes all items from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ListBox_SelectItemData - Searches a list box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_SelectString - Searches a list box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_SelItemRange - Selects or deselects one or more consecutive items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELITEMRANGE message explicitly. // ListBox_SetCaretIndex - Sets the focus rectangle to the item at the specified index in a multiple-selection list box. If the item is not visible, it is scrolled into view. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ListBox_SetColumnWidth - Sets the width of all columns in a multiple-column list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message explicitly. // ListBox_SetCurSel - Sets the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent - Set the width by which a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width). // ListBox_SetItemData - Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ListBox_SetItemHeight - Sets the height of items in a list box. // ListBox_SetSel - Selects or deselects an item in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_SetTabStops - Sets the tab-stop positions in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // ListBox_SetTopIndex - Ensures that the specified item in a list box is visible. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ScrollBar_Enable - Enables or disables a scroll bar control. // ScrollBar_GetPos - Retrieves the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar. // ScrollBar_GetRange - Gets the range of a scroll bar. // ScrollBar_SetPos - Sets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar and, if requested, redraws the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. (ScrollBar_SetPos) // ScrollBar_SetRange - Sets the range of a scroll bar. // ScrollBar_Show - Shows or hides a scroll bar control. // SelectFont - The SelectFont macro selects a font object into the specified device context (DC). The new font object replaces the previous font object. // Static_Enable - Enables or disables a static control. // Static_GetIcon - Retrieves a handle to the icon associated with a static control that has the SS_ICON style. You can use this macro or send the STM_GETICON message explicitly. // Static_GetText - Gets the text of a static control. // Static_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of a static control. // Static_SetIcon - Sets the icon for a static control. You can use this macro or send the STM_SETICON message explicitly. // Static_SetText - Sets the text of a static control. // // DEVELOPER_NOTES - BEGIN // Developer Notes // // In this article // IOCTLs // Enumerations // Functions // Interfaces // Structures // // Overview of the Developer Notes technology. // // To develop Developer Notes, you need these headers: // * advpub.h // * apiquery2.h // * appcompatapi.h // * aux_ulib.h // * avrfsdk.h // * camerauicontrol.h // * capi.h // * comppkgsup.h // * dciman.h // * ddrawgdi.h // * editionupgradehelper.h // * exdisp.h // * exposeenums2managed.h // * fci.h // * fdi.h // * fdi_fci_types.h // * featurestagingapi.h // * fhcfg.h // * fhsvcctl.h // * filehc.h // * icwcfg.h // * ime.h // * isolatedapplauncher.h // * iwscapi.h // * lmaccess.h // * loadperf.h // * msxml.h // * ntsecpkg.h // * rpcndr.h // * rtlsupportapi.h // * stralign.h // * tcpioctl.h // * tdiinfo.h // * vdmdbg.h // * wininet.h // * winnls32.h // * winreg.h // * wscapi.h // // For programming guidance for this technology, see: // * Developer Notes // * Using the Windows Headers // // IOCTLs // IOCTL_TCP_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX - Retrieves information from the TCP/IP driver. // // Enumerations // eAvrfResourceTypes - Specifies the types of resources that can be enumerated using the VerifierEnumerateResource function. // eHANDLE_TRACE_OPERATIONS - Identifies the type of handle operation that has occurred. // eHeapAllocationState - Specifies the current heap allocation state. // eHeapEnumerationLevel - Determines whether the enumeration operation should continue or stop. // eUserAllocationState - Specifies the application's current heap allocation state. // FEATURE_CHANGE_TIME - This enumeration is intended for infrastructure use only. (FEATURE_CHANGE_TIME) // FEATURE_ENABLED_STATE - This enumeration is intended for infrastructure use only. (FEATURE_ENABLED_STATE) // FH_BACKUP_STATUS - Specifies whether File History backups are enabled. // FH_DEVICE_VALIDATION_RESULT - Indicates whether the storage device or network share can be used as a File History backup target. // FH_LOCAL_POLICY_TYPE - Specifies the type of a local policy for the File History feature. Each local policy has a numeric parameter associated with it. // FH_PROTECTED_ITEM_CATEGORY - Specifies the type of an inclusion or exclusion list. // FH_RETENTION_TYPES - Specifies under what conditions previous versions of files and folders can be deleted from a backup target. // FH_TARGET_DRIVE_TYPES - Specifies the type of a File History backup target. // FH_TARGET_PROPERTY_TYPE - Specifies the type of a property of a backup target. // FIRMWARE_TYPE - Specifies a firmware type. // WSC_SECURITY_PRODUCT_STATE - Defines the current state of the security product that is made available to Windows Security Center. // WSC_SECURITY_PROVIDER - Defines all the services that are monitored by Windows Security Center (WSC). // WSC_SECURITY_PROVIDER_HEALTH - Defines the possible states for any service monitored by Windows Security Center (WSC). // WSC_SECURITY_SIGNATURE_STATUS - Reports the current version status of the security product to Windows Security Center. // // Functions // _lclose - The _lclose function closes the specified file so that it is no longer available for reading or writing. This function is provided for compatibility with 16-bit versions of Windows. Win32-based applications should use the CloseHandle function. // _lcreat - Creates or opens the specified file. // _llseek - Repositions the file pointer for the specified file. // _lopen - The _lopen function opens an existing file and sets the file pointer to the beginning of the file. This function is provided for compatibility with 16-bit versions of Windows. Win32-based applications should use the CreateFile function. // _lread - The _lread function reads data from the specified file. This function is provided for compatibility with 16-bit versions of Windows. Win32-based applications should use the ReadFile function. // _lwrite - Writes data to the specified file. // AddRemoveExcludeRule - Adds an exclusion rule to the exclusion list or removes a rule from the list. // AllowSetForegroundAccess - Allows the remote window to reflecting what is going on in the container. // ApphelpCheckShellObject - Enables applications to detect bad extension objects and either block them from running or fix them. // AreDvdCodecsEnabled - Returns a value indicating whether DVD codecs are enabled on the current device. // AssociateContextWithName - Inserts a name into the name cache to find a specified FIO_CONTEXT structure. // AssociateFileEx - Associates a file with an asnychronous context. // AuxUlibInitialize - Initializes the Aux_ulib library. // AuxUlibIsDLLSynchronizationHeld - Determines whether the caller is holding a synchronization primitive. // AuxUlibSetSystemFileCacheSize - Sets the current file system cache size. // AVRF_HANDLEOPERATION_ENUMERATE_CALLBACK - Receives information related to the enumeration of handle traces. // AVRF_HEAPALLOCATION_ENUMERATE_CALLBACK - Receives information related to heap allocations. // AVRF_RESOURCE_ENUMERATE_CALLBACK - Provides access to one of the specialized callback functions for enumeration of either heap allocation or handle trace information. // CACHE_DESTROY_CALLBACK - A function that is called whenever an entry in the name cache is destroyed. // CACHE_READ_CALLBACK - A callback that is provided to the cache to help examine items within the cache. // CacheCreateFile - Creates a file in the cache or finds an existing file. // CacheRichCreateFile - Creates a file in the cache or finds an existing file and allows properties to be added to it in the cache. // CanUpgrade - Checks if the user has sufficient permissions to upgrade the operating system, and prompts the user to run as an administrator if needed. // ChangeDefaultTargetRecommendation - Causes the currently assigned backup target to be recommended or not recommended to other members of the home group that the computer belongs to. // CheckConnectionWizard - The CheckConnectionWizard function checks that the Internet Connection Wizard (ICW) is installed and that it has not been run before. // Close - Closes the user interface control. // CoInstall - Installs the requested COM server application. // CreateDefaultConfiguration - Creates File History configuration files with default settings for the current user and loads them into an FhConfigMgr object. // DCIBeginAccess - Obtains an access pointer to display frame buffer based on the given rectangle. // DCICloseProvider - Closes a device context of a display. // DCICreatePrimary - Creates a primary surface and obtains surface information. // DCIDestroy - Destroys a primary surface on the display device. // DCIEndAccess - Releases access to display frame buffer. // DCIOpenProvider - Obtains a device context handle of display. // DdAttachSurface - The DdAttachSurface function attaches two kernel-mode surface representations. GdiEntry11 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdCreateDIBSection - Creates a DIBSECTION structure that shares its color table with the device. GdiEntry9 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdCreateDirectDrawObject - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdCreateDirectDrawObject function and creates a kernel-side representation of the Microsoft DirectDraw object. // DdCreateSurfaceObject - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdCreateSurfaceObject function and creates a kernel-mode surface object. GdiEntry4 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdDeleteDirectDrawObject - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdDeleteDirectDrawObject function and deletes a kernel-mode Microsoft DirectDraw object that was previously created using DdCreateDirectDrawObject. GdiEntry3 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdDeleteSurfaceObject - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdDeleteSurfaceObject function and deletes a kernel-mode surface object previously created by NtGdiDdCreateSurfaceObject. GdiEntry5 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdGetDC - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdGetDC function and returns a Windows Graphics Device Interface (GDI) device context (DC) that represents the Microsoft DirectDraw surface indicated. GdiEntry7 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdGetDxHandle - Returns the kernel-mode Microsoft DirectX API handle to use in subsequent calls to the kernel-mode entry points that control the DirectX API mechanism. // DdQueryDirectDrawObject - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdQueryDirectDrawObject function and queries a previously created kernel-mode representation for capabilities. GdiEntry2 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdQueryDisplaySettingsUniqueness - Returns the current value of an integer that is incremented whenever a mode switch occurs, such as when there is a desktop switch, a Fast User Switch, or a full-screen Microsoft MS-DOS box. // DdReenableDirectDrawObject - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdReenableDirectDrawObject function. // DdReleaseDC - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdReleaseDC function and releases a device context (DC) previously obtained through DdGetDC or GdiEntry7. GdiEntry8 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdResetVisrgn - Wrapper for the NtGdiDdResetVisrgn function and enables timely user-mode information on the clipping region for windows on the desktop. // DdSetGammaRamp - The DdSetGammaRamp function sets the gamma ramp for the device. // DdSwapTextureHandles - Developed for device driver interfaces (DDIs) prior to Microsoft DirectDraw 7.0 and does nothing on Microsoft Windows NT systems. All parameters are ignored. GdiEntry16 is defined as an alias for this function. // DdUnattachSurface - The DdUnattachSurface function removes an attachment, created with DdAttachSurface, between two kernel-mode surface objects. // DisableProcessWindowsGhosting - Disables the window ghosting feature for the calling GUI process. Window ghosting is a Windows Manager feature that lets the user minimize, move, or close the main window of an application that is not responding. // DnsHostnameToComputerNameA - Converts a DNS-style host name to a NetBIOS-style computer name. (ANSI) // DnsHostnameToComputerNameW - Converts a DNS-style host name to a NetBIOS-style computer name. (Unicode) // DosDateTimeToFileTime - Converts MS-DOS date and time values to a file time. // FCACHE_CREATE_CALLBACK - A callback function that is used to create items in the cache. (FCACHE_CREATE_CALLBACK) // FCACHE_RICHCREATE_CALLBACK - A callback function that is used to create items in the cache. (FCACHE_RICHCREATE_CALLBACK) // FCIAddFile - The FCIAddFile adds a file to the cabinet under construction. // FCICreate - The FCICreate function creates an FCI context. // FCIDestroy - The FCIDestroy function deletes an open FCI context, freeing any memory and temporary files associated with the context. // FCIFlushCabinet - The FCIFlushCabinet function completes the current cabinet. // FCIFlushFolder - The FCIFlushFolder function forces the current folder under construction to be completed immediately. // FDICopy - The FDICopy function extracts files from cabinets. // FDICreate - The FDICreate function creates an FDI context. // FDIDestroy - The FDIDestroy function deletes an open FDI context. // FDIIsCabinet - The FDIIsCabinet function determines whether a file is a cabinet and, if it is, returns information about it. // FDITruncateCabinet - The FDITruncateCabinet function truncates a cabinet file starting at the specified folder number. // FhServiceBlockBackup - This function temporarily blocks backups for the current user. // FhServiceClosePipe - Closes a communication channel to the File History Service opened with FhServiceOpenPipe. // FhServiceOpenPipe - Opens a communication channel to the File History Service. // FhServiceReloadConfiguration - This function causes the File History Service to reload the current user’s File History configuration files. // FhServiceStartBackup - This function starts an immediate backup for the current user. // FhServiceStopBackup - This function stops an ongoing backup cycle for the current user. // FhServiceUnblockBackup - This function unblocks backups blocked via FhServiceBlockBackup. // FileTimeToDosDateTime - Converts a file time to MS-DOS date and time values. // FindOrCreateNameCache - Finds or creates a name cache. // FindSyncContextFromName - Retrieves the FIO_CONTEXT structure that is associated with the specified user name. // FNALLOC - The FNALLOC provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to allocate memory in an FDI context. // FNCLOSE - The FNCLOSE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to close a file in an FDI context. // FNFCIALLOC - The FNFCIALLOC provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to allocate memory within an FCI context. // FNFCICLOSE - The FNFCICLOSE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to close a file in an FCI context. // FNFCIDELETE - The FNFCIDELETE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to delete a file in the FCI context. // FNFCIFILEPLACED - The FNFCIFILEPLACED macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to notify when a file is placed in the cabinet. // FNFCIFREE - The FNFCIFREE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to free previously allocated memory in an FCI context. // FNFCIGETNEXTCABINET - The FNFCIGETNEXTCABINET macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to request information for the next cabinet. // FNFCIGETOPENINFO - The FNFCIGETOPENINFO macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to open a file and retrieve file date, time, and attribute. // FNFCIGETTEMPFILE - The FNFCIGETTEMPFILE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to obtain a temporary file name. // FNFCIOPEN - The FNFCIOPEN macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to open a file in an FCI context. // FNFCIREAD - The FNFCIREAD macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to read data from a file in an FCI context. // FNFCISEEK - The FNFCISEEK macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to move a file pointer to the specified location in an FCI context. // FNFCISTATUS - The FNFCISTATUS macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to update the user. // FNFCIWRITE - The FNFCIWRITE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to write data to a file in an FCI context. // FNFDINOTIFY - The FNFDINOTIFY macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback notification function to update the application on the status of the decoder. // FNFREE - The FNFREE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to free previously allocated memory in an FDI context. // FNOPEN - The FNOPEN macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to open a file in an FDI context. // FNREAD - The FNREAD macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to read data from a file in an FDI context. // FNSEEK - The FNSEEK macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to move a file pointer to the specified location in an FDI context. // FNWRITE - The FNWRITE macro provides the declaration for the application-defined callback function to write data to a file in an FDI context. // get_Count - Gathers the total number of all security product providers of the specified type on the computer. // get_Item - Returns one of the types of providers on the computer. // get_length - Retrieves the number of elements in the collection. (IXMLElementCollection.get_length) // get_ProductName - Returns the current product information for the security product. // get_ProductState - Returns the current state of the signature data for the security product. // get_ProductStateTimestamp - Returns the current time stamp for the security product. // get_RemediationPath - Returns the current remediation path for the security product. // get_SignatureStatus - Returns the current status of the signature data for the security product. // get_TheaterMode - Sets or gets whether the object is in theater mode. (Get) // GetActiveItem - Gets the active captured item. // GetBackupStatus - Retrieves the backup status value for an FhConfigMgr object. // GetComputerNameA - Retrieves the NetBIOS name of the local computer. This name is established at system startup, when the system reads it from the registry. (ANSI) // GetComputerNameW - Retrieves the NetBIOS name of the local computer. This name is established at system startup, when the system reads it from the registry. (Unicode) // GetConfigurationDetails - This method enumerates File History configurations that were discovered on a storage device or network share by the IFhReassociation::ScanTargetForConfigurations method and returns additional information about each of the discovered configurations. // GetContainerGuid - Returns the container/VM ID. // GetCurrentHwProfileA - Retrieves information about the current hardware profile for the local computer. (ANSI) // GetCurrentHwProfileW - Retrieves information about the current hardware profile for the local computer. (Unicode) // GetCurrentViewType - Gets the type of the current view. // GetDefaultContentDecryptionModuleFactory - Returns the implementation of IMFContentDecryptionModuleFactory for the specified key system that is built-in to Windows. // GetDefaultTarget - Returns a pointer to an IFhTarget interface that can be used to query information about the currently assigned backup target. // GetDotStuffState - Determines whether dots are added to the file when any dot stuffing mechanisms are turned on. // GetFeatureEnabledState - This function is intended for infrastructure use only. (GetFeatureEnabledState) // GetFeatureVariant - This function is intended for infrastructure use only. (GetFeatureVariant) // GetFileSizeFromContext - Reports the file size cached with the handle. // GetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableA - Retrieves the value of the specified firmware environment variable. (ANSI) // GetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableExA - Retrieves the value of the specified firmware environment variable and its attributes. (ANSI) // GetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableExW - Retrieves the value of the specified firmware environment variable and its attributes. (Unicode) // GetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableW - Retrieves the value of the specified firmware environment variable. (Unicode) // GetFirmwareType - Retrieves the firmware type of the local computer. // GetGenuineLocalStatus - Retrieves whether the currently installed operating system is activated. // GetIncludeExcludeRules - Retrieves the inclusion and exclusion rules that are currently stored in an FhConfigMgr object. // GetItem - Retrieves the current item in an inclusion or exclusion list. // GetLocalPolicy - Retrieves the numeric parameter for a local policy for the File History feature. // GetMediaComponentPackageInfo - Returns a list of properties for all media codecs installed on the system that meet the specified requirements. // GetMediaExtensionCommunicationFactory - Creates a communication factory for registering a media extension. // GetNumericalProperty - Retrieves a numeric property of the File History backup target that is represented by an IFhTarget interface. // GetOsProductContentId - Retrieves the content identifier that corresponds to the current installation of the operating system. The content identifier is used to look up the operating system product in the store catalog. // GetPrivateProfileInt - The GetPrivateProfileInt function (winbase.h) retrieves an integer associated with a key in the specified section of an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileIntA - Retrieves an integer associated with a key in the specified section of an initialization file. (GetPrivateProfileIntA) // GetPrivateProfileIntW - The GetPrivateProfileIntW (Unicode) function (winbase.h) retrieves an integer associated with a key in the specified section of an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileSection - The GetPrivateProfileSection function (winbase.h) retrieves all the keys and values for the specified section of an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileSectionA - Retrieves all the keys and values for the specified section of an initialization file. (GetPrivateProfileSectionA) // GetPrivateProfileSectionNames - The GetPrivateProfileSectionNames function (winbase.h) retrieves the names of all sections in an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileSectionNamesA - Retrieves the names of all sections in an initialization file. (GetPrivateProfileSectionNamesA) // GetPrivateProfileSectionNamesW - The GetPrivateProfileSectionNamesW (Unicode) function (winbase.h) retrieves the names of all sections in an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileSectionW - The GetPrivateProfileSectionW (Unicode) function (winbase.h) retrieves all the keys and values for the specified section of an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileString - The GetPrivateProfileString function (winbase.h) retrieves a string from the specified section in an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileStringA - Retrieves a string from the specified section in an initialization file. (GetPrivateProfileStringA) // GetPrivateProfileStringW - The GetPrivateProfileStringW (Unicode) function (winbase.h) retrieves a string from the specified section in an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileStruct - The GetPrivateProfileStruct function (winbase.h) retrieves the data associated with a key in the specified section of an initialization file. // GetPrivateProfileStructA - Retrieves the data associated with a key in the specified section of an initialization file. (GetPrivateProfileStructA) // GetPrivateProfileStructW - The GetPrivateProfileStructW (Unicode) function (winbase.h) retrieves the data associated with a key in the specified section of an initialization file. // GetProfileIntA - Retrieves an integer from a key in the specified section of the Win.ini file. (ANSI) // GetProfileIntW - Retrieves an integer from a key in the specified section of the Win.ini file. (Unicode) // GetProfileSectionA - Retrieves all the keys and values for the specified section of the Win.ini file. (ANSI) // GetProfileSectionW - Retrieves all the keys and values for the specified section of the Win.ini file. (Unicode) // GetProfileStringA - Retrieves the string associated with a key in the specified section of the Win.ini file. (ANSI) // GetProfileStringW - Retrieves the string associated with a key in the specified section of the Win.ini file. (Unicode) // GetSelectedItems - Gets the selected items. // GetServerForPMP - Gets a COM server that has been registered for Protected Media Process (PMP) usage with previous call to RegisterServerForPMP. // GetStringProperty - Retrieves a string property of the File History backup target that is represented by an IFhTarget interface. // GetSystemRegistryQuota - Retrieves the current size of the registry and the maximum size that the registry is allowed to attain on the system. // GetUserNameA - Retrieves the name of the user associated with the current thread. (ANSI) // GetUserNameW - Retrieves the name of the user associated with the current thread. (Unicode) // I_NetLogonControl2 - Controls various aspects of the Netlogon service. // Initialize - Gathers information on all of the providers of the specified type on the computer. // InitializeCache - Provides the initializing values of the file handle cache. // InsertFile - Inserts a file into the cache. // InstallPerfDllA - Installs performance counter strings, as defined in an input .ini file, into the system registry. (ANSI) // InstallPerfDllW - Installs performance counter strings, as defined in an input .ini file, into the system registry. (Unicode) // InstantiateComponentFromPackage - Creates an instance of a class in an application package. // Int32x32To64 - Multiplies two signed 32-bit integers, returning a signed 64-bit integer result. // Int64ShllMod32 - Performs a left logical shift operation on an unsigned 64-bit integer value. The function provides improved shifting code for left logical shifts where the shift count is in the range 0-31. // Int64ShraMod32 - Performs a right arithmetic shift operation on a signed 64-bit integer value. The function provides improved shifting code for right arithmetic shifts where the shift count is in the range 0-31. // Int64ShrlMod32 - Performs a right logical shift operation on an unsigned 64-bit integer value. The function provides improved shifting code for right logical shifts where the shift count is in the range 0-31. // InvalidateName - Enables the user to remove a single name and all associated data from the name cache. // IsApiSetImplemented - The IsApiSetImplemented function tests if a specified API set is present on the computer. // IsContainerRunning - Determines if a container is running or suspended. // IsMediaBehaviorEnabled - Gets a value indicating whether the media behavior associated with the specified GUID is enabled. // IsNativeVhdBoot - Indicates if the OS was booted from a VHD container. // IsProcessInIsolatedContainer - Determines if a process is running in an isolated container. // IsProcessInWDAGContainer - Determines if a process is running in a Microsoft Defender Application Guard (MDAG) container. // item - Retrieves the child elements from a collection using their index, name, or both. // Launch - Launches an app inside the container. // LaunchProcess - Launches a process inside the container. // LaunchProcess2 - Launches a process in an isolated environment. // LoadConfiguration - Loads the File History configuration information for the current user into an FhConfigMgr object. // MoveToNextItem - Moves to the next item in the inclusion or exclusion list. // MulDiv - Multiplies two 32-bit values and then divides the 64-bit result by a third 32-bit value. // Multiply128 - Multiplies two 64-bit integers to produce a 128-bit integer. // MultiplyExtract128 - Multiplies two 64-bit integers to produce a 128-bit integer, shifts the product to the right by the specified number of bits, and returns the low 64 bits of the result. // MultiplyHigh - Multiplies two 64-bit integers to produce a 128-bit integer and gets the high 64 bits. // NdrComplexArrayBufferSize - The NdrComplexArrayBufferSize function calculates the required buffer size, in bytes, to marshal the complex array. // NdrComplexArrayMarshall - The NdrComplexArrayMarshall function marshals the complex array into a network buffer. // NdrComplexArrayUnmarshall - The NdrComplexArrayUnmarshall function unmarshals the complex array from the network buffer to memory. // NdrComplexStructBufferSize - The NdrComplexStructBufferSize function calculates the required buffer size, in bytes, to marshal the complex structure. // NdrComplexStructMarshall - The NdrComplexStructMarshall function marshals the complex structure into a network buffer. // NdrComplexStructUnmarshall - The NdrComplexStructUnmarshall function unmarshals the complex structure from the network buffer to memory. // NdrConformantArrayBufferSize - The NdrConformantArrayBufferSize function calculates the required buffer size, in bytes, to marshal the conformant array. // NdrConformantArrayMarshall - The NdrConformantArrayMarshall function marshals the conformant array into a network buffer. // NdrSimpleStructBufferSize - The NdrSimpleStructBufferSize function calculates the required buffer size, in bytes, to marshal the simple structure. // NdrSimpleStructMarshall - The NdrSimpleStructMarshall function marshals the simple structure into a network buffer. // NdrSimpleStructUnmarshall - The NdrSimpleStructUnmarshall function unmarshals the simple structure from the network buffer to memory. // NdrUserMarshalUnmarshall - The NdrUserMarshalUnmarshall function calls a user-defined unmarshal routine to unmarshal data with the attribute. // NtClose - Deprecated. Closes the specified handle. NtClose is superseded by CloseHandle. // NtCreateFile - Creates a new file or directory, or opens an existing file, device, directory, or volume. // NtDeviceIoControlFile - Deprecated. Builds descriptors for the supplied buffer(s) and passes the untyped data to the device driver associated with the file handle. NtDeviceIoControlFile is superseded by DeviceIoControl. // NtNotifyChangeMultipleKeys - Requests notification when a registry key or any of its subkeys changes. // NtOpenFile - Opens an existing file, device, directory, or volume, and returns a handle for the file object. // NtQueryMultipleValueKey - Retrieves values for the specified multiple-value key. // NtQueryObject - Retrieves various kinds of object information. // NtQuerySystemInformation - Retrieves the specified system information. // NtQuerySystemTime - Retrieves the current system time. // NtRenameKey - Changes the name of the specified registry key. (NtRenameKey) // NtSetInformationKey - Sets information for the specified registry key. // NtWaitForSingleObject - Deprecated. Waits until the specified object attains a state of signaled. NtWaitForSingleObject is superseded by WaitForSingleObject. // OnClosed - Occurs when the camera UI control is closed. // OnItemCaptured - Occurs when an item is captured. // OnItemDeleted - Occurs when an item is deleted. // OnStartupComplete - Occurs when startup for the camera UI control has completed. // OnSuspendComplete - Occurs when the camera UI control has completed being suspended. // PerformReassociation - This method re-establishes relationship between the current user and the configuration selected previously via the IFhReassociation::SelectConfiguration method and prepares the target device for accepting backup data from the current computer. // PopulationCount64 - Counts the number of one bits (population count) in a 64-bit unsigned integer. // PROCESSENUMPROC - Implement this function to receive information for each virtual DOS machine (VDM) that VDMEnumProcessWOW enumerates. // ProduceDotStuffedContext - Retrieves the FIO_CONTEXT structure with the requested state. // ProvisionAndSetNewTarget - Provisions a certain storage device or network share as a File History backup target and assigns it as the default backup target for the current user. // PSYMBOLSERVERCALLBACKPROC - An entry point to the symbol server DLL. // put_TheaterMode - Sets or gets whether the object is in theater mode. (Put) // QueryProtectionStatus - Retrieves the current File History protection state. // RecordFeatureError - This function is intended for infrastructure use only. (RecordFeatureError) // RecordFeatureUsage - This function is intended for infrastructure use only. (RecordFeatureUsage) // RegCloseKey - Closes a handle to the specified registry key. // RegConnectRegistryA - Establishes a connection to a predefined registry key on another computer. (ANSI) // RegConnectRegistryW - Establishes a connection to a predefined registry key on another computer. (Unicode) // RegCopyTreeA - Copies the specified registry key, along with its values and subkeys, to the specified destination key. (ANSI) // RegCopyTreeW - Copies the specified registry key, along with its values and subkeys, to the specified destination key. (Unicode) // RegCreateKeyA - Creates the specified registry key. If the key already exists in the registry, the function opens it. (ANSI) // RegCreateKeyExA - Creates the specified registry key. If the key already exists, the function opens it. Note that key names are not case sensitive. (ANSI) // RegCreateKeyExW - Creates the specified registry key. If the key already exists, the function opens it. Note that key names are not case sensitive. (Unicode) // RegCreateKeyTransactedA - Creates the specified registry key and associates it with a transaction. (ANSI) // RegCreateKeyTransactedW - Creates the specified registry key and associates it with a transaction. (Unicode) // RegCreateKeyW - Creates the specified registry key. If the key already exists in the registry, the function opens it. (Unicode) // RegDeleteKeyA - Deletes a subkey and its values. (ANSI) // RegDeleteKeyExA - Deletes a subkey and its values from the specified platform-specific view of the registry. (ANSI) // RegDeleteKeyExW - Deletes a subkey and its values from the specified platform-specific view of the registry. (Unicode) // RegDeleteKeyTransactedA - Deletes a subkey and its values from the specified platform-specific view of the registry as a transacted operation. (ANSI) // RegDeleteKeyTransactedW - Deletes a subkey and its values from the specified platform-specific view of the registry as a transacted operation. (Unicode) // RegDeleteKeyValueA - Removes the specified value from the specified registry key and subkey. (ANSI) // RegDeleteKeyValueW - Removes the specified value from the specified registry key and subkey. (Unicode) // RegDeleteKeyW - Deletes a subkey and its values. (Unicode) // RegDeleteTreeA - Deletes the subkeys and values of the specified key recursively. (ANSI) // RegDeleteTreeW - Deletes the subkeys and values of the specified key recursively. (Unicode) // RegDeleteValueA - Removes a named value from the specified registry key. (ANSI) // RegDeleteValueW - Removes a named value from the specified registry key. (Unicode) // RegDisablePredefinedCache - Disables handle caching of the predefined registry handle for HKEY_CURRENT_USER for the current process. // RegDisablePredefinedCacheEx - Disables handle caching for all predefined registry handles for the current process. // RegDisableReflectionKey - Disables registry reflection for the specified key. Disabling reflection for a key does not affect reflection of any subkeys. // RegEnableReflectionKey - Restores registry reflection for the specified disabled key. Restoring reflection for a key does not affect reflection of any subkeys. // RegEnumKeyA - Enumerates the subkeys of the specified open registry key. (RegEnumKeyA) // RegEnumKeyExA - Enumerates the subkeys of the specified open registry key. The function retrieves information about one subkey each time it is called. (ANSI) // RegEnumKeyExW - Enumerates the subkeys of the specified open registry key. The function retrieves information about one subkey each time it is called. (Unicode) // RegEnumKeyW - Enumerates the subkeys of the specified open registry key. (RegEnumKeyW) // RegEnumValueA - Enumerates the values for the specified open registry key. The function copies one indexed value name and data block for the key each time it is called. (ANSI) // RegEnumValueW - Enumerates the values for the specified open registry key. The function copies one indexed value name and data block for the key each time it is called. (Unicode) // RegFlushKey - Writes all the attributes of the specified open registry key into the registry. // RegGetValueA - Retrieves the type and data for the specified registry value. (ANSI) // RegGetValueW - Retrieves the type and data for the specified registry value. (Unicode) // RegInstallA - Updates the string registry values in the provided table. (ANSI) // RegInstallW - Updates the string registry values in the provided table. (Unicode) // RegisterMediaExtensionPackage - Registers the media extension with the given Package Family Name (PFN) for the current user. // RegisterServerForPMP - Registers a COM Server CLSID and a class factory for Protected Media Process (PMP) usage. // RegLoadAppKeyA - Loads the specified registry hive as an application hive. (ANSI) // RegLoadAppKeyW - Loads the specified registry hive as an application hive. (Unicode) // RegLoadKeyA - Creates a subkey under HKEY_USERS or HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE and loads the data from the specified registry hive into that subkey. (ANSI) // RegLoadKeyW - Creates a subkey under HKEY_USERS or HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE and loads the data from the specified registry hive into that subkey. (Unicode) // RegLoadMUIStringA - Loads the specified string from the specified key and subkey. (ANSI) // RegLoadMUIStringW - Loads the specified string from the specified key and subkey. (Unicode) // RegNotifyChangeKeyValue - Notifies the caller about changes to the attributes or contents of a specified registry key. // RegOpenCurrentUser - Retrieves a handle to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER key for the user the current thread is impersonating. // RegOpenKeyA - Opens the specified registry key. (ANSI) // RegOpenKeyExA - Opens the specified registry key. Note that key names are not case sensitive. (ANSI) // RegOpenKeyExW - Opens the specified registry key. Note that key names are not case sensitive. (Unicode) // RegOpenKeyTransactedA - Opens the specified registry key and associates it with a transaction. (ANSI) // RegOpenKeyTransactedW - Opens the specified registry key and associates it with a transaction. (Unicode) // RegOpenKeyW - Opens the specified registry key. (Unicode) // RegOpenUserClassesRoot - Retrieves a handle to the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT key for a specified user. The user is identified by an access token. // RegOverridePredefKey - Maps a predefined registry key to the specified registry key. // RegQueryInfoKeyA - Retrieves information about the specified registry key. (ANSI) // RegQueryInfoKeyW - Retrieves information about the specified registry key. (Unicode) // RegQueryMultipleValuesA - Retrieves the type and data for a list of value names associated with an open registry key. (ANSI) // RegQueryMultipleValuesW - Retrieves the type and data for a list of value names associated with an open registry key. (Unicode) // RegQueryReflectionKey - Determines whether reflection has been disabled or enabled for the specified key. // RegQueryValueA - Retrieves the data associated with the default or unnamed value of a specified registry key. The data must be a null-terminated string. (ANSI) // RegQueryValueExA - Retrieves the type and data for the specified value name associated with an open registry key. (ANSI) // RegQueryValueExW - Retrieves the type and data for the specified value name associated with an open registry key. (Unicode) // RegQueryValueW - Retrieves the data associated with the default or unnamed value of a specified registry key. The data must be a null-terminated string. (Unicode) // RegRenameKey - Changes the name of the specified registry key. (RegRenameKey) // RegReplaceKeyA - Replaces the file backing a registry key and all its subkeys with another file, so that when the system is next started, the key and subkeys will have the values stored in the new file. (ANSI) // RegReplaceKeyW - Replaces the file backing a registry key and all its subkeys with another file, so that when the system is next started, the key and subkeys will have the values stored in the new file. (Unicode) // RegRestoreKeyA - Reads the registry information in a specified file and copies it over the specified key. This registry information may be in the form of a key and multiple levels of subkeys. (ANSI) // RegRestoreKeyW - Reads the registry information in a specified file and copies it over the specified key. This registry information may be in the form of a key and multiple levels of subkeys. (Unicode) // RegSaveKeyA - Saves the specified key and all of its subkeys and values to a new file, in the standard format. (ANSI) // RegSaveKeyExA - Saves the specified key and all of its subkeys and values to a registry file, in the specified format. (ANSI) // RegSaveKeyExW - Saves the specified key and all of its subkeys and values to a registry file, in the specified format. (Unicode) // RegSaveKeyW - Saves the specified key and all of its subkeys and values to a new file, in the standard format. (Unicode) // RegSetKeyValueA - Sets the data for the specified value in the specified registry key and subkey. (ANSI) // RegSetKeyValueW - Sets the data for the specified value in the specified registry key and subkey. (Unicode) // RegSetValueA - Sets the data for the default or unnamed value of a specified registry key. The data must be a text string. (ANSI) // RegSetValueExA - Sets the data and type of a specified value under a registry key. (ANSI) // RegSetValueExW - Sets the data and type of a specified value under a registry key. (Unicode) // RegSetValueW - Sets the data for the default or unnamed value of a specified registry key. The data must be a text string. (Unicode) // RegUnLoadKeyA - Unloads the specified registry key and its subkeys from the registry. (ANSI) // RegUnLoadKeyW - Unloads the specified registry key and its subkeys from the registry. (Unicode) // ReleaseNameCache - Releases a name cache. // RemoveCapturedItem - Removes the captured item. // RequireNetworkDuringMediaTaskCompletion - Increments or decrements the count of network connections required for media task completion. // Resume - Simulates resume of the user interface control. // RtlAnsiStringToUnicodeString - Converts the specified ANSI source string into a Unicode string. // RtlCharToInteger - Converts a character string to an integer. // RtlFreeAnsiString - Frees the string buffer allocated by RtlUnicodeStringToAnsiString. // RtlFreeOemString - Frees the string buffer allocated by RtlUnicodeStringToOemString. // RtlFreeUnicodeString - Frees the string buffer allocated by RtlAnsiStringToUnicodeString or by RtlUpcaseUnicodeString. // RtlInitString - Initializes a counted string. // RtlInitUnicodeString - Initializes a counted Unicode string. // RtlIsNameLegalDOS8Dot3 - Determines whether or not a specified name can be used to create a file on the FAT file system. // RtlLocalTimeToSystemTime - Converts the specified local time to system time. // RtlRaiseException - Raises an exception. // RtlTimeToSecondsSince1970 - Converts the specified 64-bit system time to the number of seconds since the beginning of January 1, 1970. // RtlUnicodeStringToAnsiString - Converts the specified Unicode source string into an ANSI string. // RtlUnicodeStringToOemString - Converts the specified Unicode source string into an OEM string. The translation is done with respect to the OEM code page (OCP). // RtlUnicodeToMultiByteSize - Determines how many bytes are needed to represent a Unicode string as an ANSI string. // RtlUniform - Generates a uniform random number using D.H. Lehmer's 1948 algorithm. // SaveConfiguration - Saves to disk all the changes that were made in an FhConfigMgr object since the last time that the LoadConfiguration, CreateDefaultConfiguration or SaveConfiguration method was called for the File History configuration files of the current user. // ScanTargetForConfigurations - Scans the namespace on a specified storage device or network share for File History configurations that can be reassociated with and continued to be used on the current computer. // SelectConfiguration - Selects one of the File History configurations discovered on a storage device or network share by the IFhReassociation::ScanTargetForConfigurations method for subsequent reassociation. // SendIMEMessageExA - Specifies an action or processing for the Input Method Editor (IME) through a specified subfunction. (ANSI) // SendIMEMessageExW - Specifies an action or processing for the Input Method Editor (IME) through a specified subfunction. (Unicode) // SetBackupStatus - Changes the backup status value for an FhConfigMgr object. // SetDotStuffingOnWrites - Enables dot-stuffing properties on the write path of the file handle cache of the message. // SetDotStuffState - Enables dot stuffing to be set in an FIO_CONTEXT structure. // SetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableA - Sets the value of the specified firmware environment variable. (ANSI) // SetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableExA - Sets the value of the specified firmware environment variable as the attributes that indicate how this variable is stored and maintained. // SetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableExW - Sets the value of the specified firmware environment variable and the attributes that indicate how this variable is stored and maintained. // SetFirmwareEnvironmentVariableW - Sets the value of the specified firmware environment variable. (Unicode) // SetLocalPolicy - Changes the numeric parameter value of a local policy in an FhConfigMgr object. // SetShellNext - Sets the ShellNext registry key with the specified value. // ShareDirectory - Shares a host directory into the container, either as read-only or supporting modification. // ShiftLeft128 - Shifts 128-bit left. // ShiftRight128 - Shifts 128-bit right. // Show - Displays the user interface control for the camera. // ShowProductKeyUI - Displays the user interface through which the user can provide a product key to upgrade or get a genuine copy of the operating system. // SubscribeFeatureStateChangeNotification - This function is intended for infrastructure use only. (SubscribeFeatureStateChangeNotification) // Suspend - Simulates suspend of the user interface control. // TAG - Identifies an entry in the shim database. // TASKENUMPROCEX - Implement this function to receive information for each task that VDMEnumTaskWOWEx enumerates. // TCOMPfromLZXWindow - The TCOMPfromLZXWindow macro converts window size into an LXZTCOMP value for FCIAddFile. // TerminateCache - Eliminates the cache and ends asynchronous I/O with the DLL. // uaw_wcslen - Retrieves the number of characters in a null-terminated Unicode string. // UInt32x32To64 - Multiplies two unsigned 32-bit integers, returning an unsigned 64-bit integer result. // UnregisterServerForPMP - Registers a COM Server CLSID and a class factory that were previously registered for Protected Media Process (PMP) usage. // UnsignedMultiply128 - Multiplies two unsigned 64-bit integers to produce an unsigned 128-bit integer. // UnsignedMultiplyExtract128 - Multiplies two unsigned 64-bit integers to produce an unsigned 128-bit integer, shifts the product to the right by the specified number of bits, and returns the low 64 bits of the result. // UnsignedMultiplyHigh - Multiplies two 64-bit integers to produce a 128-bit integer and gets the high unsigned 64 bits. // UnsubscribeFeatureStateChangeNotification - This function is intended for infrastructure use only. (UnsubscribeFeatureStateChangeNotification) // UpdateOperatingSystem - Upgrades the installed edition of the operating system to the edition that the user purchased in the Windows Store, or gets a genuine copy of the operating system. // ValidateTarget - Checks whether a certain storage device or network share can be used as a File History backup target. // ValidateTarget - This method checks whether a certain storage device or network share can be used as a File History default target and, thus, whether reassociation is possible at all or not. // VDMEnumProcessWOW - Enumerates all virtual DOS machines running 16-bit Windows tasks. // VDMEnumTaskWOWEx - Enumerates tasks within a particular virtual DOS machine (VDM). // VER_SET_CONDITION - Sets the bits of a 64-bit value to indicate the comparison operator to use for a specified operating system version attribute. This macro is used to build the dwlConditionMask parameter of the VerifyVersionInfo function. // VerifierEnumerateResource - Enumerates operating system resources for use by debugging and support tools. // VerifierIsPerUserSettingsEnabled - Determines whether Application Verifier can use per-user settings. // VerifyVersionInfoA - Compares a set of operating system version requirements to the corresponding values for the currently running version of the system. (ANSI) // VerifyVersionInfoW - Compares a set of operating system version requirements to the corresponding values for the currently running version of the system. (Unicode) // VerSetConditionMask - Sets the bits of a 64-bit value to indicate the comparison operator to use for a specified operating system version attribute. This function is used to build the dwlConditionMask parameter of the VerifyVersionInfo function. // WINNLSEnableIME - Temporarily enables or disables an Input Method Editor (IME) and, at the same time, turns on or off the display of all windows owned by the IME. // WritePrivateProfileSectionA - Replaces the keys and values for the specified section in an initialization file. (ANSI) // WritePrivateProfileSectionW - Replaces the keys and values for the specified section in an initialization file. (Unicode) // WritePrivateProfileStringA - Copies a string into the specified section of an initialization file. (ANSI) // WritePrivateProfileStringW - Copies a string into the specified section of an initialization file. (Unicode) // WritePrivateProfileStructA - Copies data into a key in the specified section of an initialization file. As it copies the data, the function calculates a checksum and appends it to the end of the data. (ANSI) // WritePrivateProfileStructW - Copies data into a key in the specified section of an initialization file. As it copies the data, the function calculates a checksum and appends it to the end of the data. (Unicode) // WriteProfileSectionA - Replaces the contents of the specified section in the Win.ini file with specified keys and values. (ANSI) // WriteProfileSectionW - Replaces the contents of the specified section in the Win.ini file with specified keys and values. (Unicode) // WriteProfileStringA - Copies a string into the specified section of the Win.ini file. (ANSI) // WriteProfileStringW - Copies a string into the specified section of the Win.ini file. (Unicode) // WscGetSecurityProviderHealth - Gets the aggregate health state of the security provider categories represented by the specified WSC_SECURITY_PROVIDER enumeration values. // WscRegisterForChanges - Registers a callback function to be run when Windows Security Center (WSC) detects a change that could affect the health of one of the security providers. // WscUnRegisterChanges - Cancels a callback registration that was made by a call to the WscRegisterForChanges function. // // Interfaces // ICameraUIControl - Enables a user interface control for a camera device.. // ICameraUIControlEventCallback - Callback interface for receiving events from the camera user interface control. // IEditionUpgradeHelper - Allows the Windows Store to install a Windows product that the user purchased, to perform either an upgrade to the edition of Windows that the user currently has installed, or to replace a non-genuine copy of Windows with a genuine copy of Windows. // IFhConfigMgr - The IFhConfigMgr interface allows client applications to read and modify the File History configuration for the user account under which the methods of this interface are called. // IFhReassociation - This interface allows client applications to reassociate a File History configuration from a File History target with the current user. // IFhScopeIterator - The IFhScopeIterator interface allows client applications to enumerate individual items in an inclusion or exclusion list. To retrieve inclusion and exclusion lists, call the IFhConfigMgr::GetIncludeExcludeRules method. // IFhTarget - The IFhTarget interface allows client applications to read numeric and string properties of a File History backup target. // IIsolatedAppLauncher - Enables apps to determine whether they are running in a Microsoft Defender Application Guard (MDAG) container (VM container environment). // IIsolatedProcessLauncher - Enables apps to determine whether processes are running in a Microsoft Defender Application Guard (MDAG) container (VM container environment). // IIsolatedProcessLauncher2 - Enables apps to determine whether processes are running in a Microsoft Defender Application Guard (MDAG) container (VM container environment). // IWebBrowser2 - Exposes methods that are implemented by the WebBrowser control (Microsoft ActiveX control) or implemented by an instance of the InternetExplorer application (OLE Automation). // IWscProduct - Provides methods for getting product information for an individual provider to interact with Windows Security Center. // IWSCProductList - Provides methods to collect product information for the selected type of providers installed on the computer. // IXMLElementCollection - Supports collection of XML elements for indexed access. // // Structures // AVRF_BACKTRACE_INFORMATION - Contains information about backtraces performed. // AVRF_HANDLE_OPERATION - Contains information required to collect handle trace information. // AVRF_HEAP_ALLOCATION - Stores metadata information about heap allocation. // CCAB - The CCAB structure contains cabinet information. // ERF - The ERF structure contains error information from FCI/FDI. The caller should not modify this structure. // FDICABINETINFO - The FDICABINETINFO structure contains details about a particular cabinet file. // FDINOTIFICATION - The FDINOTIFICATION structure to provide information to FNFDINOTIFY. // FEATURE_ERROR - This structure is intended for infrastructure use only. // HW_PROFILE_INFOA - Contains information about a hardware profile. (ANSI) // HW_PROFILE_INFOW - Contains information about a hardware profile. (Unicode) // IFEntry - Describes a TCP/IP interface in accord with the Simple Network Management Protocol, version 2, (SNMPv2) standard for Management Information Base for network management of TCP/IP networks (MIB-II), as specified in the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Request for Comments (RFC) 1213 on pages 16 through 23. // IMESTRUCT - Used by SendIMEMessageEx to specify the subfunction to be executed in the Input Method Editor (IME) message and its parameters. This structure is also used to receive return values from those subfunctions. // IPAddrEntry - Implements part of the Management Information Base (MIB-II) information group for the Internet Protocol (IP) as specified in the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Request for Comments (RFC) 2011. (IPAddrEntry) // IPInterfaceInfo - The IPInterfaceInfo structure contains information about a specific IP interface, returned by the IOCTL_TCP_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX control code. // IPSNMPInfo - Implements part of the Management Information Base (MIB-II) information group for the Internet Protocol (IP) as specified in the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Request for Comments (RFC) 2011. (IPSNMPInfo) // IsolatedAppLauncherTelemetryParameters - A struct that provides telemetry parameters to be used when launching an app inside the container. // JAVA_TRUST - Contains trust information. // NAME_CACHE_CONTEXT - Represents a name cache. // NETLOGON_INFO_1 - Defines a level-1 control query response from a domain controller. // NETLOGON_INFO_2 - Defines a level-2 control query response from a domain controller. // NETLOGON_INFO_3 - Defines a level-3 control query response from a domain controller. // NETLOGON_INFO_4 - Defines a level-4 control query response from a domain controller. // OSVERSIONINFOA - Contains operating system version information. (ANSI) // OSVERSIONINFOEXA - Contains operating system version information. The information includes major and minor version numbers, a build number, a platform identifier, and information about product suites and the latest Service Pack installed on the system. (ANSI) // OSVERSIONINFOEXW - Contains operating system version information. The information includes major and minor version numbers, a build number, a platform identifier, and information about product suites and the latest Service Pack installed on the system. (Unicode) // OSVERSIONINFOW - Contains operating system version information. (Unicode) // STRENTRYA - Represents a registry string replacement. (ANSI) // STRENTRYW - Represents a registry string replacement. (Unicode) // STRING - Used with the RtlUnicodeStringToOemString function. // STRTABLEA - Represents a table of registry string replacements. (ANSI) // STRTABLEW - Represents a table of registry string replacements. (Unicode) // TCP_REQUEST_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX_W2K - The TCP_REQUEST_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX_W2K structure (tdiinfo.h) contains the input for the IOCTL_TCP_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX control code. // TCP_REQUEST_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX_XP - The TCP_REQUEST_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX_XP structure (tdiinfo.h) contains the input for the IOCTL_TCP_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX control code. // TDIEntityID - Contains a part of the TDIObjectID structure to represent information about TDI drivers retrieved using the IOCTL_TCP_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX control code. // TDIObjectID - Contains a part of the TCP_REQUEST_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX structure that is used with the IOCTL_TCP_QUERY_INFORMATION_EX control code to specify the kind of information being requested from the TCP driver. // VALENTA - Contains information about a registry value. The RegQueryMultipleValues function uses this structure. (ANSI) // VALENTW - Contains information about a registry value. The RegQueryMultipleValues function uses this structure. (Unicode) // // LITERATURE_SOURCES // * PHP_NET (2024-04-18) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_winprog/ // DEVELOPER_NOTES - END // // WINDOWS_AND_MESSAGES - BEGIN // Windows and Messages // // In this article // Functions // Structures // // Overview of the Windows and Messages technology. // The Windows and Messages technology is not associated with any headers. // // For programming guidance for this technology, see: // * Windows and Messages // // Functions // AdjustWindowRect - Calculates the required size of the window rectangle, based on the desired client-rectangle size. The window rectangle can then be passed to the CreateWindow function to create a window whose client area is the desired size. // AdjustWindowRectEx - Calculates the required size of the window rectangle, based on the desired size of the client rectangle. The window rectangle can then be passed to the CreateWindowEx function to create a window whose client area is the desired size. // AllowSetForegroundWindow - Enables the specified process to set the foreground window using the SetForegroundWindow function. The calling process must already be able to set the foreground window. For more information, see Remarks later in this topic. // AnimateWindow - Enables you to produce special effects when showing or hiding windows. There are four types of animation:_roll, slide, collapse or expand, and alpha-blended fade. // AnyPopup - Indicates whether an owned, visible, top-level pop-up, or overlapped window exists on the screen. The function searches the entire screen, not just the calling application's client area. // ArrangeIconicWindows - Arranges all the minimized (iconic) child windows of the specified parent window. // BeginDeferWindowPos - Allocates memory for a multiple-window- position structure and returns the handle to the structure. // BringWindowToTop - Brings the specified window to the top of the Z order. If the window is a top-level window, it is activated. If the window is a child window, the top-level parent window associated with the child window is activated. // BroadcastSystemMessage - The BroadcastSystemMessage function sends a message to the specified recipients. (BroadcastSystemMessage) // BroadcastSystemMessageA - Sends a message to the specified recipients. (BroadcastSystemMessageA) // BroadcastSystemMessageExA - Sends a message to the specified recipients. (BroadcastSystemMessageExA) // BroadcastSystemMessageExW - Sends a message to the specified recipients. (BroadcastSystemMessageExW) // BroadcastSystemMessageW - The BroadcastSystemMessageW (Unicode) function sends a message to the specified recipients. (BroadcastSystemMessageW) // CalculatePopupWindowPosition - Calculates an appropriate pop-up window position using the specified anchor point, pop-up window size, flags, and the optional exclude rectangle. // CallMsgFilterA - Passes the specified message and hook code to the hook procedures associated with the WH_SYSMSGFILTER and WH_MSGFILTER hooks. (ANSI) // CallMsgFilterW - Passes the specified message and hook code to the hook procedures associated with the WH_SYSMSGFILTER and WH_MSGFILTER hooks. (Unicode) // CallNextHookEx - Passes the hook information to the next hook procedure in the current hook chain. A hook procedure can call this function either before or after processing the hook information. // CallWindowProcA - Passes message information to the specified window procedure. (ANSI) // CallWindowProcW - Passes message information to the specified window procedure. (Unicode) // CascadeWindows - Cascades the specified child windows of the specified parent window. // ChangeWindowMessageFilter - Adds or removes a message from the User Interface Privilege Isolation (UIPI) message filter. // ChangeWindowMessageFilterEx - Modifies the User Interface Privilege Isolation (UIPI) message filter for a specified window. // ChildWindowFromPoint - Determines which, if any, of the child windows belonging to a parent window contains the specified point. The search is restricted to immediate child windows. Grandchildren, and deeper descendant windows are not searched. // ChildWindowFromPointEx - Determines which, if any, of the child windows belonging to the specified parent window contains the specified point. // CloseWindow - Minimizes (but does not destroy) the specified window. // CreateMDIWindowA - Creates a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window. (ANSI) // CreateMDIWindowW - Creates a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window. (Unicode) // CreateWindowA - Creates an overlapped, pop-up, or child window. (ANSI) // CreateWindowExA - Creates an overlapped, pop-up, or child window with an extended window style; otherwise, this function is identical to the CreateWindow function. (ANSI) // CreateWindowExW - Creates an overlapped, pop-up, or child window with an extended window style; otherwise, this function is identical to the CreateWindow function. (Unicode) // CreateWindowW - Creates an overlapped, pop-up, or child window. (Unicode) // DeferWindowPos - Updates the specified multiple-window � position structure for the specified window. // DefFrameProcA - Provides default processing for any window messages that the window procedure of a multiple-document interface (MDI) frame window does not process. (ANSI) // DefFrameProcW - Provides default processing for any window messages that the window procedure of a multiple-document interface (MDI) frame window does not process. (Unicode) // DefMDIChildProcA - Provides default processing for any window message that the window procedure of a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window does not process. (ANSI) // DefMDIChildProcW - Provides default processing for any window message that the window procedure of a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window does not process. (Unicode) // DefWindowProcA - Calls the default window procedure to provide default processing for any window messages that an application does not process. (ANSI) // DefWindowProcW - Calls the default window procedure to provide default processing for any window messages that an application does not process. (Unicode) // DeregisterShellHookWindow - Unregisters a specified Shell window that is registered to receive Shell hook messages. // DestroyWindow - Destroys the specified window. // DispatchMessage - The DispatchMessage function dispatches a message to a window procedure. It is typically used to dispatch a message retrieved by the GetMessage function. // DispatchMessageA - Dispatches a message to a window procedure. It is typically used to dispatch a message retrieved by the GetMessage function. (DispatchMessageA) // DispatchMessageW - The DispatchMessageW (Unicode) function dispatches a message to a window procedure. It is typically used to dispatch a message retrieved by the GetMessage function. // EndDeferWindowPos - Simultaneously updates the position and size of one or more windows in a single screen-refreshing cycle. // EndTask - Forcibly closes the specified window. // EnumChildWindows - Enumerates the child windows that belong to the specified parent window by passing the handle to each child window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function. // EnumPropsA - Enumerates all entries in the property list of a window by passing them, one by one, to the specified callback function. EnumProps continues until the last entry is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE. (ANSI) // EnumPropsExA - Enumerates all entries in the property list of a window by passing them, one by one, to the specified callback function. EnumPropsEx continues until the last entry is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE. (ANSI) // EnumPropsExW - Enumerates all entries in the property list of a window by passing them, one by one, to the specified callback function. EnumPropsEx continues until the last entry is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE. (Unicode) // EnumPropsW - Enumerates all entries in the property list of a window by passing them, one by one, to the specified callback function. EnumProps continues until the last entry is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE. (Unicode) // EnumThreadWindows - Enumerates all nonchild windows associated with a thread by passing the handle to each window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function. // EnumWindows - Enumerates all top-level windows on the screen by passing the handle to each window, in turn, to an application-defined callback function. EnumWindows continues until the last top-level window is enumerated or the callback function returns FALSE. // FindWindowA - Retrieves a handle to the top-level window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. This function does not search child windows. This function does not perform a case-sensitive search. (ANSI) // FindWindowExA - Retrieves a handle to a window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. The function searches child windows, beginning with the one following the specified child window. This function does not perform a case-sensitive search. (ANSI) // FindWindowExW - Retrieves a handle to a window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. The function searches child windows, beginning with the one following the specified child window. This function does not perform a case-sensitive search. (Unicode) // FindWindowW - Retrieves a handle to the top-level window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. This function does not search child windows. This function does not perform a case-sensitive search. (Unicode) // GET_X_LPARAM - Retrieves the signed x-coordinate from the specified LPARAM value. // GET_Y_LPARAM - Retrieves the signed y-coordinate from the given LPARAM value. // GetAltTabInfoA - Retrieves status information for the specified window if it is the application-switching (ALT+TAB) window. (ANSI) // GetAltTabInfoW - Retrieves status information for the specified window if it is the application-switching (ALT+TAB) window. (Unicode) // GetAncestor - Retrieves the handle to the ancestor of the specified window. // GetClassInfoA - Retrieves information about a window class. (ANSI) // GetClassInfoExA - Retrieves information about a window class, including a handle to the small icon associated with the window class. The GetClassInfo function does not retrieve a handle to the small icon. (ANSI) // GetClassInfoExW - Retrieves information about a window class, including a handle to the small icon associated with the window class. The GetClassInfo function does not retrieve a handle to the small icon. (Unicode) // GetClassInfoW - Retrieves information about a window class. (Unicode) // GetClassLongA - Retrieves the specified 32-bit (DWORD) value from the WNDCLASSEX structure associated with the specified window. (ANSI) // GetClassLongPtrA - Retrieves the specified value from the WNDCLASSEX structure associated with the specified window. (ANSI) // GetClassLongPtrW - Retrieves the specified value from the WNDCLASSEX structure associated with the specified window. (Unicode) // GetClassLongW - Retrieves the specified 32-bit (DWORD) value from the WNDCLASSEX structure associated with the specified window. (Unicode) // GetClassName - The GetClassName function retrieves the name of the class to which the specified window belongs. (GetClassName) // GetClassNameA - Retrieves the name of the class to which the specified window belongs. (GetClassNameA) // GetClassNameW - The GetClassNameW (Unicode) function retrieves the name of the class to which the specified window belongs. (GetClassNameW) // GetClassWord - Retrieves the 16-bit (WORD) value at the specified offset into the extra class memory for the window class to which the specified window belongs. // GetClientRect - Retrieves the coordinates of a window's client area. // GetDesktopWindow - Retrieves a handle to the desktop window. The desktop window covers the entire screen. The desktop window is the area on top of which other windows are painted. // GetForegroundWindow - Retrieves a handle to the foreground window (the window with which the user is currently working). The system assigns a slightly higher priority to the thread that creates the foreground window than it does to other threads. // GetGUIThreadInfo - Retrieves information about the active window or a specified GUI thread. // GetInputState - Determines whether there are mouse-button or keyboard messages in the calling thread's message queue. // GetLastActivePopup - Determines which pop-up window owned by the specified window was most recently active. // GetLayeredWindowAttributes - Retrieves the opacity and transparency color key of a layered window. // GetMessage - The GetMessage function retrieves a message from the calling thread's message queue. (GetMessage) // GetMessageA - Retrieves a message from the calling thread's message queue. The function dispatches incoming sent messages until a posted message is available for retrieval. (GetMessageA) // GetMessageExtraInfo - Retrieves the extra message information for the current thread. Extra message information is an application- or driver-defined value associated with the current thread's message queue. // GetMessagePos - Retrieves the cursor position for the last message retrieved by the GetMessage function. // GetMessageTime - Retrieves the message time for the last message retrieved by the GetMessage function. // GetMessageW - The GetMessageW function (Unicode) retrieves a message from the calling thread's message queue. (GetMessageW) // GetNextWindow - Retrieves a handle to the next or previous window in the Z-Order. The next window is below the specified window; the previous window is above. // GetParent - Retrieves a handle to the specified window's parent or owner. // GetProcessDefaultLayout - Retrieves the default layout that is used when windows are created with no parent or owner. // GetPropA - Retrieves a data handle from the property list of the specified window. The character string identifies the handle to be retrieved. The string and handle must have been added to the property list by a previous call to the SetProp function. (ANSI) // GetPropW - Retrieves a data handle from the property list of the specified window. The character string identifies the handle to be retrieved. The string and handle must have been added to the property list by a previous call to the SetProp function. (Unicode) // GetQueueStatus - Retrieves the type of messages found in the calling thread's message queue. // GetShellWindow - Retrieves a handle to the Shell's desktop window. // GetSysColor - Retrieves the current color of the specified display element. // GetSystemMetrics - Retrieves the specified system metric or system configuration setting. // GetTitleBarInfo - Retrieves information about the specified title bar. // GetTopWindow - Examines the Z order of the child windows associated with the specified parent window and retrieves a handle to the child window at the top of the Z order. // GetWindow - Retrieves a handle to a window that has the specified relationship (Z-Order or owner) to the specified window. // GetWindowDisplayAffinity - Retrieves the current display affinity setting, from any process, for a given window. // GetWindowInfo - Retrieves information about the specified window. (GetWindowInfo) // GetWindowLongA - Retrieves information about the specified window. (GetWindowLongA) // GetWindowLongPtrA - Retrieves information about the specified window. The function also retrieves the value at a specified offset into the extra window memory. (ANSI) // GetWindowLongPtrW - Retrieves information about the specified window. The function also retrieves the value at a specified offset into the extra window memory. (Unicode) // GetWindowLongW - Retrieves information about the specified window. (GetWindowLongW) // GetWindowModuleFileNameA - Retrieves the full path and file name of the module associated with the specified window handle. (ANSI) // GetWindowModuleFileNameW - Retrieves the full path and file name of the module associated with the specified window handle. (Unicode) // GetWindowPlacement - Retrieves the show state and the restored, minimized, and maximized positions of the specified window. // GetWindowRect - Retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. // GetWindowTextA - Copies the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one) into a buffer. If the specified window is a control, the text of the control is copied. However, GetWindowText cannot retrieve the text of a control in another application. (ANSI) // GetWindowTextLengthA - Retrieves the length, in characters, of the specified window's title bar text (if the window has a title bar). (ANSI) // GetWindowTextLengthW - Retrieves the length, in characters, of the specified window's title bar text (if the window has a title bar). (Unicode) // GetWindowTextW - Copies the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one) into a buffer. If the specified window is a control, the text of the control is copied. However, GetWindowText cannot retrieve the text of a control in another application. (Unicode) // GetWindowThreadProcessId - Retrieves the identifier of the thread that created the specified window and, optionally, the identifier of the process that created the window. // GetWindowWord - Retrieves the 16-bit (DWORD) value at the specified offset into the extra window memor // HOOKPROC - An application-defined or library-defined callback function used with the SetWindowsHookEx function. The system calls this function after the SendMessage function is called. The hook procedure can examine the message; it cannot modify it. // InSendMessage - Determines whether the current window procedure is processing a message that was sent from another thread (in the same process or a different process) by a call to the SendMessage function. // InSendMessageEx - Determines whether the current window procedure is processing a message that was sent from another thread (in the same process or a different process). // InternalGetWindowText - Copies the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one) into a buffer. // IsChild - Determines whether a window is a child window or descendant window of a specified parent window. // IsGUIThread - Determines whether the calling thread is already a GUI thread. It can also optionally convert the thread to a GUI thread. // IsHungAppWindow - Determines whether the system considers that a specified application is not responding. // IsIconic - Determines whether the specified window is minimized (iconic). // IsProcessDPIAware - IsProcessDPIAware may be altered or unavailable. Instead, use GetProcessDPIAwareness. // IsWindow - Determines whether the specified window handle identifies an existing window. // IsWindowArranged - Determines whether the specified window is arranged (that is, whether it's snapped). // IsWindowUnicode - Determines whether the specified window is a native Unicode window. // IsWindowVisible - Determines the visibility state of the specified window. // IsZoomed - Determines whether a window is maximized. // KillTimer - Destroys the specified timer. // LockSetForegroundWindow - The foreground process can call the LockSetForegroundWindow function to disable calls to the SetForegroundWindow function. // LogicalToPhysicalPoint - Converts the logical coordinates of a point in a window to physical coordinates. // MAKELPARAM - Creates a value for use as an lParam parameter in a message. The macro concatenates the specified values. // MAKELRESULT - Creates a value for use as a return value from a window procedure. The macro concatenates the specified values. // MAKEWPARAM - Creates a value for use as a wParam parameter in a message. The macro concatenates the specified values. // MoveWindow - Changes the position and dimensions of the specified window. // OpenIcon - Restores a minimized (iconic) window to its previous size and position; it then activates the window. // PeekMessageA - Dispatches incoming nonqueued messages, checks the thread message queue for a posted message, and retrieves the message (if any exist). (ANSI) // PeekMessageW - Dispatches incoming nonqueued messages, checks the thread message queue for a posted message, and retrieves the message (if any exist). (Unicode) // PhysicalToLogicalPoint - Converts the physical coordinates of a point in a window to logical coordinates. // PostMessageA - Places (posts) a message in the message queue associated with the thread that created the specified window and returns without waiting for the thread to process the message. (ANSI) // PostMessageW - Places (posts) a message in the message queue associated with the thread that created the specified window and returns without waiting for the thread to process the message. (Unicode) // PostQuitMessage - Indicates to the system that a thread has made a request to terminate (quit). It is typically used in response to a WM_DESTROY message. // PostThreadMessageA - Posts a message to the message queue of the specified thread. It returns without waiting for the thread to process the message. (ANSI) // PostThreadMessageW - Posts a message to the message queue of the specified thread. It returns without waiting for the thread to process the message. (Unicode) // PROPENUMPROCA - An application-defined callback function used with the EnumProps function. (ANSI) // PROPENUMPROCEXA - Application-defined callback function used with the EnumPropsEx function. (ANSI) // PROPENUMPROCEXW - Application-defined callback function used with the EnumPropsEx function. (Unicode) // PROPENUMPROCW - An application-defined callback function used with the EnumProps function. (Unicode) // RealChildWindowFromPoint - Retrieves a handle to the child window at the specified point. The search is restricted to immediate child windows; grandchildren and deeper descendant windows are not searched. // RealGetWindowClassA - Retrieves a string that specifies the window type. (ANSI) // RealGetWindowClassW - Retrieves a string that specifies the window type. (Unicode) // RegisterClassA - Registers a window class for subsequent use in calls to the CreateWindow or CreateWindowEx function. (RegisterClassA) // RegisterClassExA - Registers a window class for subsequent use in calls to the CreateWindow or CreateWindowEx function. (RegisterClassExA) // RegisterClassExW - Registers a window class for subsequent use in calls to the CreateWindow or CreateWindowEx function. (RegisterClassExW) // RegisterClassW - Registers a window class for subsequent use in calls to the CreateWindow or CreateWindowEx function. (RegisterClassW) // RegisterShellHookWindow - Registers a specified Shell window to receive certain messages for events or notifications that are useful to Shell applications. // RegisterWindowMessageA - Defines a new window message that is guaranteed to be unique throughout the system. The message value can be used when sending or posting messages. (ANSI) // RegisterWindowMessageW - Defines a new window message that is guaranteed to be unique throughout the system. The message value can be used when sending or posting messages. (Unicode) // RemovePropA - Removes an entry from the property list of the specified window. The specified character string identifies the entry to be removed. (ANSI) // RemovePropW - Removes an entry from the property list of the specified window. The specified character string identifies the entry to be removed. (Unicode) // ReplyMessage - Replies to a message sent from another thread by the SendMessage function. // SENDASYNCPROC - An application-defined callback function used with the SendMessageCallback function. // SendMessage - The SendMessage function sends the specified message to a window or windows. (SendMessage function) // SendMessageA - Sends the specified message to a window or windows. The SendMessage function calls the window procedure for the specified window and does not return until the window procedure has processed the message. (SendMessageA) // SendMessageCallbackA - Sends the specified message to a window or windows. (SendMessageCallbackA) // SendMessageCallbackW - Sends the specified message to a window or windows. (SendMessageCallbackW) // SendMessageTimeoutA - Sends the specified message to one or more windows. (ANSI) // SendMessageTimeoutW - Sends the specified message to one or more windows. (Unicode) // SendMessageW - The SendMessageW (Unicode) function sends the specified message to a window or windows. (SendMessageW). SendNotifyMessageAvSends the specified message to a window or windows. (SendNotifyMessageA) // SendNotifyMessageW - Sends the specified message to a window or windows. (SendNotifyMessageW) // SetAdditionalForegroundBoostProcesses - SetAdditionalForegroundBoostProcesses is a performance assist API to help applications with a multi-process application model where multiple processes contribute to a foreground experience, either as data or rendering. // SetClassLongA - Replaces the specified 32-bit (long) value at the specified offset into the extra class memory or the WNDCLASSEX structure for the class to which the specified window belongs. (ANSI) // SetClassLongPtrA - Replaces the specified value at the specified offset in the extra class memory or the WNDCLASSEX structure for the class to which the specified window belongs. (ANSI) // SetClassLongPtrW - Replaces the specified value at the specified offset in the extra class memory or the WNDCLASSEX structure for the class to which the specified window belongs. (Unicode) // SetClassLongW - Replaces the specified 32-bit (long) value at the specified offset into the extra class memory or the WNDCLASSEX structure for the class to which the specified window belongs. (Unicode) // SetClassWord - Replaces the 16-bit (WORD) value at the specified offset into the extra class memory for the window class to which the specified window belongs. // SetCoalescableTimer - Creates a timer with the specified time-out value and coalescing tolerance delay. // SetForegroundWindow - Brings the thread that created the specified window into the foreground and activates the window. // SetLayeredWindowAttributes - Sets the opacity and transparency color key of a layered window. // SetMessageExtraInfo - Sets the extra message information for the current thread. // SetParent - Changes the parent window of the specified child window. // SetProcessDefaultLayout - Changes the default layout when windows are created with no parent or owner only for the currently running process. // SetProcessDPIAware - SetProcessDPIAware may be altered or unavailable. Instead, use SetProcessDPIAwareness. // SetPropA - Adds a new entry or changes an existing entry in the property list of the specified window. (ANSI) // SetPropW - Adds a new entry or changes an existing entry in the property list of the specified window. (Unicode) // SetSysColors - Sets the colors for the specified display elements. // SetTimer - Creates a timer with the specified time-out value. // SetWindowDisplayAffinity - Stores the display affinity setting in kernel mode on the hWnd associated with the window. // SetWindowLongA - Changes an attribute of the specified window. The function also sets the 32-bit (long) value at the specified offset into the extra window memory. (ANSI) // SetWindowLongPtrA - Changes an attribute of the specified window. (ANSI) // SetWindowLongPtrW - Changes an attribute of the specified window. (Unicode) // SetWindowLongW - Changes an attribute of the specified window. The function also sets the 32-bit (long) value at the specified offset into the extra window memory. (Unicode) // SetWindowPlacement - Sets the show state and the restored, minimized, and maximized positions of the specified window. // SetWindowPos - Changes the size, position, and Z order of a child, pop-up, or top-level window. These windows are ordered according to their appearance on the screen. The topmost window receives the highest rank and is the first window in the Z order. // SetWindowsHookExA - Installs an application-defined hook procedure into a hook chain. (ANSI) // SetWindowsHookExW - Installs an application-defined hook procedure into a hook chain. (Unicode) // SetWindowTextA - Changes the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one). If the specified window is a control, the text of the control is changed. However, SetWindowText cannot change the text of a control in another application. (ANSI) // SetWindowTextW - Changes the text of the specified window's title bar (if it has one). If the specified window is a control, the text of the control is changed. However, SetWindowText cannot change the text of a control in another application. (Unicode) // ShowOwnedPopups - Shows or hides all pop-up windows owned by the specified window. // ShowWindow - Sets the specified window's show state. // ShowWindowAsync - Sets the show state of a window without waiting for the operation to complete. // SoundSentry - Triggers a visual signal to indicate that a sound is playing. // SwitchToThisWindow - Switches focus to the specified window and brings it to the foreground. // SystemParametersInfoA - Retrieves or sets the value of one of the system-wide parameters. (ANSI) // SystemParametersInfoW - Retrieves or sets the value of one of the system-wide parameters. (Unicode) // TileWindows - Tiles the specified child windows of the specified parent window. // TIMERPROC - An application-defined callback function that processes WM_TIMER messages. The TIMERPROC type defines a pointer to this callback function. TimerProc is a placeholder for the application-defined function name. // TranslateMDISysAccel - Processes accelerator keystrokes for window menu commands of the multiple-document interface (MDI) child windows associated with the specified MDI client window. // TranslateMessage - Translates virtual-key messages into character messages. The character messages are posted to the calling thread's message queue, to be read the next time the thread calls the GetMessage or PeekMessage function. // UnhookWindowsHookEx - Removes a hook procedure installed in a hook chain by the SetWindowsHookEx function. // UnregisterClassA - Unregisters a window class, freeing the memory required for the class. (ANSI) // UnregisterClassW - Unregisters a window class, freeing the memory required for the class. (Unicode) // UpdateLayeredWindow - Updates the position, size, shape, content, and translucency of a layered window. // WaitMessage - Yields control to other threads when a thread has no other messages in its message queue. The WaitMessage function suspends the thread and does not return until a new message is placed in the thread's message queue. // WindowFromPhysicalPoint - Retrieves a handle to the window that contains the specified physical point. // WindowFromPoint - Retrieves a handle to the window that contains the specified point. // WinMain - The user-provided entry point for a graphical Windows-based application. // WNDPROC - A callback function, which you define in your application, that processes messages sent to a window. // // Structures // ALTTABINFO - Contains status information for the application-switching (ALT+TAB) window. // ANIMATIONINFO - Describes the animation effects associated with user actions. // AUDIODESCRIPTION - Contains information associated with audio descriptions. This structure is used with the SystemParametersInfo function when the SPI_GETAUDIODESCRIPTION or SPI_SETAUDIODESCRIPTION action value is specified. // BSMINFO - Contains information about a window that denied a request from BroadcastSystemMessageEx. // CBT_CREATEWNDA - Contains information passed to a WH_CBT hook procedure, CBTProc, before a window is created. (ANSI) // CBT_CREATEWNDW - Contains information passed to a WH_CBT hook procedure, CBTProc, before a window is created. (Unicode) // CBTACTIVATESTRUCT - Contains information passed to a WH_CBT hook procedure, CBTProc, before a window is activated. // CHANGEFILTERSTRUCT - Contains extended result information obtained by calling the ChangeWindowMessageFilterEx function. // CLIENTCREATESTRUCT - Contains information about the menu and first multiple-document interface (MDI) child window of an MDI client window. // CREATESTRUCTA - Defines the initialization parameters passed to the window procedure of an application. These members are identical to the parameters of the CreateWindowEx function. (ANSI) // CREATESTRUCTW - Defines the initialization parameters passed to the window procedure of an application. These members are identical to the parameters of the CreateWindowEx function. (Unicode) // CWPRETSTRUCT - Defines the message parameters passed to a WH_CALLWNDPROCRET hook procedure, CallWndRetProc. // CWPSTRUCT - Defines the message parameters passed to a WH_CALLWNDPROC hook procedure, CallWndProc. // DEBUGHOOKINFO - Contains debugging information passed to a WH_DEBUG hook procedure, DebugProc. // EVENTMSG - Contains information about a hardware message sent to the system message queue. This structure is used to store message information for the JournalPlaybackProc callback function. // GUITHREADINFO - Contains information about a GUI thread. // KBDLLHOOKSTRUCT - Contains information about a low-level keyboard input event. // MDICREATESTRUCTA - Contains information about the class, title, owner, location, and size of a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window. (ANSI) // MDICREATESTRUCTW - Contains information about the class, title, owner, location, and size of a multiple-document interface (MDI) child window. (Unicode) // MINIMIZEDMETRICS - Contains the scalable metrics associated with minimized windows. // MINMAXINFO - Contains information about a window's maximized size and position and its minimum and maximum tracking size. // MOUSEHOOKSTRUCT - Contains information about a mouse event passed to a WH_MOUSE hook procedure, MouseProc. // MOUSEHOOKSTRUCTEX - Contains information about a mouse event passed to a WH_MOUSE hook procedure, MouseProc. This is an extension of the MOUSEHOOKSTRUCT structure that includes information about wheel movement or the use of the X button. // MSG - Contains message information from a thread's message queue. // MSLLHOOKSTRUCT - Contains information about a low-level mouse input event. // NCCALCSIZE_PARAMS - Contains information that an application can use while processing the WM_NCCALCSIZE message to calculate the size, position, and valid contents of the client area of a window. // NONCLIENTMETRICSA - Contains the scalable metrics associated with the nonclient area of a nonminimized window. (ANSI) // NONCLIENTMETRICSW - Contains the scalable metrics associated with the nonclient area of a nonminimized window. (Unicode) // STYLESTRUCT - Contains the styles for a window. // TITLEBARINFO - Contains title bar information. // TITLEBARINFOEX - Expands on the information described in the TITLEBARINFO structure by including the coordinates of each element of the title bar. // UPDATELAYEREDWINDOWINFO - Used by UpdateLayeredWindowIndirect to provide position, size, shape, content, and translucency information for a layered window. // WINDOWINFO - Contains window information. // WINDOWPLACEMENT - Contains information about the placement of a window on the screen. // WINDOWPOS - Contains information about the size and position of a window. // WNDCLASSA - Contains the window class attributes that are registered by the RegisterClass function. (ANSI) // WNDCLASSEXA - Contains window class information. (ANSI) // WNDCLASSEXW - Contains window class information. (Unicode) // WNDCLASSW - Contains the window class attributes that are registered by the RegisterClass function. (Unicode) // // LITERATURE_SOURCES // * PHP_NET (2024-04-18) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_winmsg/ // WINDOWS_AND_MESSAGES - END // // WINDOWS_CONTROLS - BEGIN // Windows Controls // // In this article // Class // Enumerations // Functions // Interfaces // Structures // // Overview of the Windows Controls technology. // // To develop Windows Controls, you need these headers: // * commctrl.h // * commoncontrols.h // * dpa_dsa.h // * prsht.h // * richedit.h // * richole.h // * shlobj.h // * textserv.h // * tom.h // * uxtheme.h // * windowsx.h // * winuser.h // // For programming guidance for this technology, see: // * Windows Controls // // Class // ITextHost - The ITextHost interface is used by a text services object to obtain text host services. // ITextHost2 - The ITextHost2 interface extends the ITextHost interface. // ITextServices - Extends the Text Object Model (TOM) to provide extra functionality for windowless operation. // ITextServices2 - The ITextServices2 interface extends the ITextServices interface. // // Enumerations // BP_ANIMATIONSTYLE - Used in the BP_ANIMATIONPARAMS structure to declare animation options. // BP_BUFFERFORMAT - Specifies the format of the buffer. Used by BeginBufferedAnimation and BeginBufferedPaint. // EC_ENDOFLINE - Indicates the end of line character used by an edit control. // EC_SEARCHWEB_ENTRYPOINT - Defines constants that indicate the entry point of a web search. // FEEDBACK_TYPE - Specifies the visual feedback associated with an event. // INPUT_MESSAGE_DEVICE_TYPE - The type of device that sent the input message. // INPUT_MESSAGE_ORIGIN_ID - The ID of the input message source. // KHYPH - Contains values used to specify how to do hyphenation in a rich edit control. The HyphenateProc callback function uses this enumeration type. // MANCODE - Represents mathematical alphanumeric codes. // OBJECTTYPE - Defines values that identify object types in the Text Object Model (TOM) content. // POINTER_DEVICE_CURSOR_TYPE - Identifies the pointer device cursor types. // POINTER_DEVICE_TYPE - Identifies the pointer device types. // POINTER_FEEDBACK_MODE - Identifies the visual feedback behaviors available to CreateSyntheticPointerDevice. // PROPERTYORIGIN - Returned by GetThemePropertyOrigin to specify where a property was found. // TEXTMODE - Indicates the text mode of a rich edit control. The EM_SETTEXTMODE and EM_GETTEXTMODE messages use this enumeration type. // THEMESIZE - Identifies the type of size value to retrieve for a visual style part. // tomConstants - Defines values that are used with the Text Object Model (TOM) API. // UNDONAMEID - Contains values that indicate types of rich edit control actions that can be undone or redone. The EM_GETREDONAME and EM_GETUNDONAME messages use this enumeration type to return a value. // WINDOWTHEMEATTRIBUTETYPE - Specifies the type of visual style attribute to set on a window. // // Functions // _NewEnum - Retrieves an IEnumVARIANT enumerator interface for this collection of stories. // ActivateAs - Handles Activate As behavior by unloading all objects of the old class, telling OLE to treat those objects as objects of the new class, and reloading the objects. If objects cannot be reloaded, they are deleted. // Add - Adds an image or images to an image list. (IImageList.Add) // Add - Adds a string to the end of the collection. // AddMasked - Adds an image or images to an image list, generating a mask from the specified bitmap. (IImageList.AddMasked) // AddSubrange - Adds a subrange to this range. // AddTab - Adds a tab at the displacement tbPos, with type tbAlign, and leader style, tbLeader. // Animate_Close - Closes an AVI clip. You can use this macro or send the ACM_OPEN message explicitly, passing in NULL parameters. // Animate_Create - Creates an animation control. Animate_Create calls the CreateWindow function to create the animation control. // Animate_IsPlaying - Checks to see if an Audio-Video Interleaved (AVI) clip is playing. You can use this macro or send an ACM_ISPLAYING message. // Animate_Open - Opens an AVI clip and displays its first frame in an animation control. You can use this macro or send the ACM_OPEN message explicitly. // Animate_OpenEx - Opens an AVI clip from a resource in a specified module and displays its first frame in an animation control. You can use this macro or send the ACM_OPEN message explicitly. // Animate_Play - Plays an AVI clip in an animation control. The control plays the clip in the background while the thread continues executing. You can use this macro or send the ACM_PLAY message explicitly. // Animate_Seek - Directs an animation control to display a particular frame of an AVI clip. The control displays the clip in the background while the thread continues executing. You can use this macro or send the ACM_PLAY message explicitly. // Animate_Stop - Stops playing an AVI clip in an animation control. You can use this macro or send the ACM_STOP message explicitly. // Append - Appends a string to the string at the specified index in the collection. // Apply - Applies the formatting attributes of this text row object to the specified rows in the associated ITextRange2. // AttachMsgFilter - Attaches a new message filter to the edit instance. All window messages that the edit instance receives are forwarded to the message filter. // AutoCorrectProc - The AutoCorrectProc function is an application-defined callback function that is used with the EM_SETAUTOCORRECTPROC message. // BeginBufferedAnimation - Begins a buffered animation operation. The animation consists of a cross-fade between the contents of two buffers over a specified period of time. // BeginBufferedPaint - Begins a buffered paint operation. // BeginDrag - Begins dragging an image. (IImageList.BeginDrag) // BeginEditCollection - Turns on edit collection (also called undo grouping). // BeginPanningFeedback - Notifies the system to send feedback about a target window affected by panning gestures. // BufferedPaintClear - Clears a specified rectangle in the buffer to ARGB = {0,0,0,0}. // BufferedPaintInit - Initialize buffered painting for the current thread. // BufferedPaintRenderAnimation - Paints the next frame of a buffered paint animation. // BufferedPaintSetAlpha - Sets the alpha to a specified value in a given rectangle. The alpha controls the amount of transparency applied when blending with the buffer onto the destination target device context (DC). // BufferedPaintStopAllAnimations - Stops all buffered animations for the given window. // BufferedPaintUnInit - Closes down buffered painting for the current thread. Called once for each call to BufferedPaintInit after calls to BeginBufferedPaint are no longer needed. // BuildUpMath - Converts the linear-format math in a range to a built-up form, or modifies the current built-up form. // Button_Enable - Enables or disables a button. // Button_GetCheck - Gets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETCHECK message explicitly. // Button_GetIdealSize - Gets the size of the button that best fits the text and image, if an image list is present. You can use this macro or send the BCM_GETIDEALSIZE message explicitly. // Button_GetImageList - Gets the BUTTON_IMAGELIST structure that describes the image list that is set for a button control. You can use this macro or send the BCM_GETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // Button_GetNote - Gets the text of the note associated with a command link button. You can use this macro or send the BCM_GETNOTE message explicitly. // Button_GetNoteLength - Gets the length of the note text that may be displayed in the description for a command link. Use this macro or send the BCM_GETNOTELENGTH message explicitly. // Button_GetSplitInfo - Gets information for a specified split button control. Use this macro or send the BCM_GETSPLITINFO message explicitly. // Button_GetState - Retrieves the state of a button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETSTATE message explicitly. // Button_GetText - Gets the text of a button. // Button_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of a button. // Button_GetTextMargin - Gets the margins used to draw text in a button control. You can use this macro or send the BCM_GETTEXTMARGIN message explicitly. // Button_SetCheck - Sets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETCHECK message explicitly. // Button_SetDropDownState - Sets the drop down state for a specified button with style of BS_SPLITBUTTON. Use this macro or send the BCM_SETDROPDOWNSTATE message explicitly. // Button_SetElevationRequiredState - Sets the elevation required state for a specified button or command link to display an elevated icon. Use this macro or send the BCM_SETSHIELD message explicitly. // Button_SetImageList - Assigns an image list to a button control. You can use this macro or send the BCM_SETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // Button_SetNote - Sets the text of the note associated with a specified command link button. You can use this macro or send the BCM_SETNOTE message explicitly. // Button_SetSplitInfo - Sets information for a specified split button control. Use this macro or send the BCM_SETSPLITINFO message explicitly. // Button_SetState - Sets the highlight state of a button. The highlight state indicates whether the button is highlighted as if the user had pushed it. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTATE message explicitly. // Button_SetStyle - Sets the style of a button. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTYLE message explicitly. // Button_SetText - Sets the text of a button. // Button_SetTextMargin - Sets the margins for drawing text in a button control. You can use this macro or send the BCM_SETTEXTMARGIN message explicitly. // CanChange - Determines whether the font can be changed. // CanChange - Determines whether the paragraph formatting can be changed. // CanChange - Determines whether changes can be made to this row. // CanEdit - Determines whether the specified range can be edited. // CanPaste - Determines if a data object can be pasted, using a specified format, into the current range. // Cat2 - Concatenates two strings. // CatTop2 - Inserts text between the top two strings in a collection. // ChangeCase - Changes the case of letters in this range according to the Type parameter. // CheckDlgButton - Changes the check state of a button control. // CheckRadioButton - Adds a check mark to (checks) a specified radio button in a group and removes a check mark from (clears) all other radio buttons in the group. // CheckTextLimit - Checks whether the number of characters to be added would exceed the maximum text limit. // ClearAllTabs - Clears all tabs, reverting to equally spaced tabs with the default tab spacing. // Clone - Clones an existing image list. // CloseThemeData - Closes the theme data handle. // Collapse - Collapses the specified text range into a degenerate point at either the beginning or end of the range. // ComboBox_AddItemData - Adds item data to the list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_AddString - Adds a string to a list in a combo box. // ComboBox_DeleteString - Deletes the item at the specified location in a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_Dir - Adds names to the list displayed by a combo box. // ComboBox_Enable - Enables or disables a combo box control. // ComboBox_FindItemData - Finds the first item in a combo box list that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_FindString - Finds the first string in a combo box list that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_FindStringExact - Finds the first string in a combo box list that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetCount - Gets the number of items in the list box of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetCueBannerText - Gets the cue banner text displayed in the edit control of a combo box. Use this macro or send the CB_GETCUEBANNER message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetCurSel - Gets the index of the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect - Retrieves the screen coordinates of a combo box in its dropped-down state. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetDroppedState - Ascertains whether the drop list in a combo box control is visible. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDSTATE message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetExtendedUI - Ascertains whether a combo box is using the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetItemData - Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetItemHeight - Retrieves the height of list items in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetLBText - Gets a string from a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXT message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetLBTextLen - Gets the length of a string in the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ComboBox_GetMinVisible - Gets the minimum number of visible items in the drop-down list of a combo box. // ComboBox_GetText - Retrieves the text from a combo box control. // ComboBox_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of a combo box. // ComboBox_InsertItemData - Inserts item data in a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_InsertString - Adds a string to a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_LimitText - Limits the length of the text the user may type into the edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // ComboBox_ResetContent - Removes all items from the list box and edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ComboBox_SelectItemData - Searches a list in a combo box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_SelectString - Searches a list in a combo box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetCueBannerText - Sets the cue banner text that is displayed for the edit control of a combo box. // ComboBox_SetCurSel - Sets the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetExtendedUI - Selects either the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI for a combo box that has the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetItemData - Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetItemHeight - Sets the height of list items or the selection field in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ComboBox_SetMinVisible - Sets the minimum number of visible items in the drop-down list of a combo box. // ComboBox_SetText - Sets the text of a combo box. // ComboBox_ShowDropdown - Shows or hides the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SHOWDROPDOWN message explicitly. // ContextSensitiveHelp - Indicates if a rich edit control should transition into or out of context-sensitive help mode. A rich edit control calls the IRichEditOle::ContextSensitiveHelp method of any in-place object which is currently active if a state change is occurring. // ContextSensitiveHelp - Indicates if the application should transition into or out of context-sensitive help mode. This method should implement the functionality described for IOleWindow::ContextSensitiveHelp. // ConvertObject - Converts an object to a new type. This call reloads the object but does not force an update; the caller must do this. // Copy - Copies images from a given image list. // Copy - Copies the text to a data object. // CreateMappedBitmap - Creates a bitmap for use in a toolbar. // CreatePropertySheetPageA - Creates a new page for a property sheet. (ANSI) // CreatePropertySheetPageW - Creates a new page for a property sheet. (Unicode) // CreateProvider - Obtains a Microsoft UI Automation provider object for the parent of a windowless rich edit control. // CreateStatusWindowA - Creates a status window, which is typically used to display the status of an application. (ANSI) // CreateStatusWindowW - Creates a status window, which is typically used to display the status of an application. (Unicode) // CreateSyntheticPointerDevice - Configures the pointer injection device for the calling application, and initializes the maximum number of simultaneous pointers that the app can inject. // CreateTextServices - The CreateTextServices function creates an instance of a text services object. The text services object supports a variety of interfaces, including ITextServices and the Text Object Model (TOM). // CreateToolbarEx - Creates a toolbar window and adds the specified buttons to the toolbar. // CreateUpDownControl - Creates an up-down control. Note:_This function is obsolete. It is a 16 bit function and cannot handle 32 bit values for range and position. // Cut - Cuts the plain or rich text to a data object or to the Clipboard, depending on the pVar parameter. // DateTime_CloseMonthCal - Closes the date and time picker (DTP) control. Use this macro or send the DTM_CLOSEMONTHCAL message explicitly. // DateTime_GetDateTimePickerInfo - Gets information for a specified date and time picker (DTP) control. // DateTime_GetIdealSize - Gets the size needed to display the control without clipping. Use this macro or send the DTM_GETIDEALSIZE message explicitly. // DateTime_GetMonthCal - Gets the handle to a date and time picker's (DTP) child month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the DTM_GETMONTHCAL message explicitly. // DateTime_GetMonthCalColor - Gets the color for a given portion of the month calendar within a date and time picker (DTP) control. You can use this macro or send the DTM_GETMCCOLOR message explicitly. // DateTime_GetMonthCalFont - Gets the font that the date and time picker (DTP) control's child month calendar control is currently using. You can use this macro or send the DTM_GETMCFONT message explicitly. // DateTime_GetMonthCalStyle - Gets the style of a specified date and time picker (DTP) control. Use this macro or send the DTM_GETMCSTYLE message explicitly. // DateTime_GetRange - Gets the current minimum and maximum allowable system times for a date and time picker (DTP) control. You can use this macro, or send the DTM_GETRANGE message explicitly. // DateTime_GetSystemtime - Gets the currently selected time from a date and time picker (DTP) control and places it in a specified SYSTEMTIME structure. You can use this macro, or send the DTM_GETSYSTEMTIME message explicitly. // DateTime_SetFormat - Sets the display of a date and time picker (DTP) control based on a given format string. You can use this macro or send the DTM_SETFORMAT message explicitly. // DateTime_SetMonthCalColor - Sets the color for a given portion of the month calendar within a date and time picker (DTP) control. You can use this macro or send the DTM_SETMCCOLOR message explicitly. // DateTime_SetMonthCalFont - Sets the font to be used by the date and time picker (DTP) control's child month calendar control. You can use this macro or explicitly send the DTM_SETMCFONT message. // DateTime_SetMonthCalStyle - Sets the style for a specified date and time picker (DTP) control. Use this macro or send the DTM_SETMCSTYLE message explicitly. // DateTime_SetRange - Sets the minimum and maximum allowable system times for a date and time picker (DTP) control. You can use this macro or send the DTM_SETRANGE message explicitly. // DateTime_SetSystemtime - Sets a date and time picker (DTP) control to a given date and time. You can use this macro or send the DTM_SETSYSTEMTIME message explicitly. // Delete - Mimics the DELETE and BACKSPACE keys, with and without the CTRL key depressed. // DeleteObject - Sends notification that an object is about to be deleted from a rich edit control. The object is not necessarily being released when this member is called. // DeleteRange - Deletes the contents of a given range. // DeleteSubrange - Deletes a subrange from a range. // DeleteTab - Deletes a tab at a specified displacement. // DestroyPropertySheetPage - Destroys a property sheet page. An application must call this function for pages that have not been passed to the PropertySheet function. // DestroySyntheticPointerDevice - Destroys the specified pointer injection device. // DiscardImages - Discards images from list, as specified. // DlgDirListA - Replaces the contents of a list box with the names of the subdirectories and files in a specified directory. You can filter the list of names by specifying a set of file attributes. The list can optionally include mapped drives. (ANSI) // DlgDirListComboBoxA - Replaces the contents of a combo box with the names of the subdirectories and files in a specified directory. You can filter the list of names by specifying a set of file attributes. The list of names can include mapped drive letters. (ANSI) // DlgDirListComboBoxW - Replaces the contents of a combo box with the names of the subdirectories and files in a specified directory. You can filter the list of names by specifying a set of file attributes. The list of names can include mapped drive letters. (Unicode) // DlgDirListW - Replaces the contents of a list box with the names of the subdirectories and files in a specified directory. You can filter the list of names by specifying a set of file attributes. The list can optionally include mapped drives. (Unicode) // DlgDirSelectComboBoxExA - Retrieves the current selection from a combo box filled by using the DlgDirListComboBox function. The selection is interpreted as a drive letter, a file, or a directory name. (ANSI) // DlgDirSelectComboBoxExW - Retrieves the current selection from a combo box filled by using the DlgDirListComboBox function. The selection is interpreted as a drive letter, a file, or a directory name. (Unicode) // DlgDirSelectExA - Retrieves the current selection from a single-selection list box. It assumes that the list box has been filled by the DlgDirList function and that the selection is a drive letter, filename, or directory name. (ANSI) // DlgDirSelectExW - Retrieves the current selection from a single-selection list box. It assumes that the list box has been filled by the DlgDirList function and that the selection is a drive letter, filename, or directory name. (Unicode) // DPA_AppendPtr - Inserts a new item at the end of a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_Clone - Duplicates a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_Create - Creates a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_CreateEx - Creates a dynamic pointer array (DPA) using a given specified size and heap location. // DPA_DeleteAllPtrs - Removes all items from a dynamic pointer array (DPA) and shrinks the DPA accordingly. // DPA_DeletePtr - Removes an item from a dynamic pointer array (DPA). The DPA shrinks if necessary to accommodate the removed item. // DPA_Destroy - Frees a Dynamic Pointer Array (DPA). // DPA_DestroyCallback - Calls pfnCB on each element of the dynamic pointer array (DPA), then frees the DPA. // DPA_EnumCallback - Iterates through the Dynamic Pointer Array (DPA) and calls pfnCB on each item. // DPA_FastDeleteLastPtr - Deletes the last pointer from a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_FastGetPtr - Gets the value of the specified pointer in the dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_GetPtr - Gets an item from a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_GetPtrCount - Gets the number of pointers in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_GetPtrIndex - Gets the index of a matching item found in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_GetPtrPtr - Gets the pointer to the internal pointer array of a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_GetSize - Gets the size of a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_Grow - Changes the number of pointers in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_InsertPtr - Inserts a new item at a specified position in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). If necessary, the DPA expands to accommodate the new item. // DPA_LoadStream - Loads the dynamic pointer array (DPA) from a stream by calling the specified callback function to read each element. // DPA_Merge - Combines the contents of two dynamic pointer arrays (DPAs). // DPA_SaveStream - Saves the dynamic pointer array (DPA) to a stream by writing out a header, and then calling the specified callback function to write each element. // DPA_Search - Finds an item in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_SetPtr - Assigns a value to an item in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_SetPtrCount - Sets the number of pointers in a dynamic pointer array (DPA). // DPA_Sort - Sorts the items in a Dynamic Pointer Array (DPA). // DPA_SortedInsertPtr - Inserts a new item before or after a specified existing item. // DragEnter - Locks updates to the specified window during a drag operation and displays the drag image at the specified position within the window. (IImageList.DragEnter) // DragLeave - Unlocks the specified window and hides the drag image, which enables the window to update. // DragMove - Moves the image that is being dragged during a drag-and-drop operation. This function is typically called in response to a WM_MOUSEMOVE message. (IImageList.DragMove) // DragShowNolock - Shows or hides the image being dragged. (IImageList.DragShowNolock) // Draw - Draws an image list item in the specified device context. (IImageList.Draw) // DrawInsert - Draws the insert icon in the parent window of the specified drag list box. // DrawShadowText - Draws text that has a shadow. // DrawStatusTextA - The DrawStatusText function draws the specified text in the style of a status window with borders. (ANSI) // DrawStatusTextW - The DrawStatusText function draws the specified text in the style of a status window with borders. (Unicode) // DrawThemeBackground - Draws the border and fill defined by the visual style for the specified control part. // DrawThemeBackgroundEx - Draws the background image defined by the visual style for the specified control part. // DrawThemeEdge - Draws one or more edges defined by the visual style of a rectangle. // DrawThemeIcon - Draws an image from an image list with the icon effect defined by the visual style. // DrawThemeParentBackground - Draws the part of a parent control that is covered by a partially-transparent or alpha-blended child control. // DrawThemeParentBackgroundEx - Used by partially-transparent or alpha-blended child controls to draw the part of their parent in front of which they appear. Sends a WM_ERASEBKGND message followed by a WM_PRINTCLIENT. // DrawThemeText - Draws text using the color and font defined by the visual style. // DrawThemeTextEx - Draws text using the color and font defined by the visual style. Extends DrawThemeText by allowing additional text format options. // DSA_AppendItem - Appends a new item to the end of a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_Clone - Duplicates a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_Create - Creates a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_DeleteAllItems - Deletes all items from a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_DeleteItem - Deletes an item from a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_Destroy - Frees a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_DestroyCallback - Iterates through a dynamic structure array (DSA), calling a specified callback function on each item. Upon reaching the end of the array, the DSA is freed. // DSA_EnumCallback - Iterates through the dynamic structure array (DSA) and calls pfnCB on each item. // DSA_GetItem - Gets an element from a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_GetItemCount - Gets the number of items in a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_GetItemPtr - Gets a pointer to an element from a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_GetSize - Gets the size of the dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_InsertItem - Inserts a new item into a dynamic structure array (DSA). If necessary, the DSA expands to accommodate the new item. // DSA_SetItem - Sets the contents of an element in a dynamic structure array (DSA). // DSA_Sort - Sorts the items in a dynamic structure array (DSA). // Edit_CanUndo - Determines whether there are any actions in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_CANUNDO message explicitly. // Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer - Resets the undo flag of an edit or rich edit control. The undo flag is set whenever an operation within the edit control can be undone. You can use this macro or send the EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER message explicitly. // Edit_Enable - Enables or disables an edit control. // Edit_EnableSearchWeb - Enables or disables the "Search with Bing…" context menu item in edit controls. You can use this macro or send the EM_ENABLESEARCHWEB message explicitly. // Edit_FmtLines - Sets a flag that determines whether text retrieved from a multiline edit control includes soft line-break characters. // Edit_GetCaretIndex - Gets the character index of the caret location for a given edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // Edit_GetCueBannerText - Gets the text that is displayed as a textual cue, or tip, in an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETCUEBANNER message explicitly. // Edit_GetEndOfLine - Gets the end of line character used for the content of the edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETENDOFLINE message explicitly. // Edit_GetExtendedStyle - Gets the extended styles that are currently in use for a given edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETEXTENDEDSTYLE message explicitly. // Edit_GetFileLine - Gets the text of the specified file (or logical) line (text wrap delimiters are ignored). You can use this macro or send the EM_GETFILELINE message explicitly. // Edit_GetFileLineCount - Gets the number of file (or logical) lines (text wrap delimiters are ignored). You can use this macro or send the EM_GETFILELINECOUNT message explicitly. // Edit_GetFileLineFromChar - Gets the index of the file (or logical) line of text that includes the specified character index (text wrap delimiters are ignored). You can use this macro or send the EM_FILELINEFROMCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_GetFileLineIndex - Gets the index of the file (or logical) line of text based on the specified visible line. You can use this macro or send the EM_FILELINEINDEX message explicitly. // Edit_GetFileLineLength - Gets the length of the file (or logical) line of text from the specified character index (text wrap delimiters are ignored). You can use this macro or send the EM_FILELINELENGTH message explicitly. // Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine - Gets the index of the uppermost visible line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE message explicitly. // Edit_GetHandle - Gets a handle to the memory currently allocated for the text of a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETHANDLE message explicitly. // Edit_GetHilite - This macro is not implemented. (Edit_GetHilite) // Edit_GetLine - Retrieves a line of text from an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINE message explicitly. // Edit_GetLineCount - Gets the number of lines in the text of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINECOUNT message explicitly. // Edit_GetModify - Gets the state of an edit or rich edit control's modification flag. The flag indicates whether the contents of the control have been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETMODIFY message explicitly. // Edit_GetPasswordChar - Gets the password character for an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_GetRect - Gets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETRECT message explicitly. // Edit_GetSel - Gets the starting and ending character positions of the current selection in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETSEL message explicitly. // Edit_GetText - Gets the text of an edit control. // Edit_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of an edit control. // Edit_GetWordBreakProc - Retrieves the address of an edit or rich edit control's Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // Edit_GetZoom - Gets the current zoom ratio of an edit control (the zoom ratio is always between 1/64 and 64). You can use this macro or send the EM_GETZOOM message explicitly. // Edit_HideBalloonTip - Hides any balloon tip associated with an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_HIDEBALLOONTIP message explicitly. // Edit_LimitText - Limits the length of text that can be entered into an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // Edit_LineFromChar - Gets the index of the line that contains the specified character index in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEFROMCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_LineIndex - Gets the character index of the first character of a specified line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEINDEX message explicitly. // Edit_LineLength - Retrieves the length, in characters, of a line in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINELENGTH message explicitly. // Edit_NoSetFocus - Prevents a single-line edit control from receiving keyboard focus. You can use this macro or send the EM_NOSETFOCUS message explicitly. // Edit_ReplaceSel - Replaces the selected text in an edit control or a rich edit control with the specified text. You can use this macro or send the EM_REPLACESEL message explicitly. // Edit_Scroll - Scrolls the text vertically in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLL message explicitly. // Edit_ScrollCaret - Scrolls the caret into view in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLLCARET message explicitly. // Edit_SearchWeb - Invokes the "Search with Bing…" context menu item in edit controls. You can use this macro or send the EM_SEARCHWEB message explicitly. // Edit_SetCaretIndex - Sets the character index at which to locate the caret. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // Edit_SetCueBannerText - Sets the text that is displayed as the textual cue, or tip, for an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETCUEBANNER message explicitly. (Edit_SetCueBannerText) // Edit_SetCueBannerTextFocused - Sets the text that is displayed as the textual cue, or tip, for an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETCUEBANNER message explicitly. (Edit_SetCueBannerTextFocused) // Edit_SetEndOfLine - Sets the end of line character used for the content of the edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETENDOFLINE message explicitly. // Edit_SetExtendedStyle - Sets extended styles for edit controls using the style mask. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETEXTENDEDSTYLE message explicitly. // Edit_SetHandle - Sets the handle of the memory that will be used by a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETHANDLE message explicitly. // Edit_SetHilite - This macro is not implemented. (Edit_SetHilite) // Edit_SetModify - Sets or clears the modification flag for an edit control. The modification flag indicates whether the text within the edit control has been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETMODIFY message explicitly. // Edit_SetPasswordChar - Sets or removes the password character for an edit or rich edit control. When a password character is set, that character is displayed in place of the characters typed by the user. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // Edit_SetReadOnly - Sets or removes the read-only style (ES_READONLY) of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETREADONLY message explicitly. // Edit_SetRect - Sets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECT message explicitly. // Edit_SetRectNoPaint - Sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control. This macro is equivalent to Edit_SetRect, except that it does not redraw the edit control window. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECTNP message explicitly. // Edit_SetSel - Selects a range of characters in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETSEL message explicitly. // Edit_SetTabStops - Sets the tab stops in a multiline edit or rich edit control. When text is copied to the control, any tab character in the text causes space to be generated up to the next tab stop. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // Edit_SetText - Sets the text of an edit control. // Edit_SetWordBreakProc - Replaces an edit control's default Wordwrap function with an application-defined Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // Edit_SetZoom - Sets the current zoom ratio of an edit control (the zoom ratio is always between 1/64 and 64). You can use this macro or send the EM_SETZOOM message explicitly. // Edit_ShowBalloonTip - Displays a balloon tip associated with an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SHOWBALLOONTIP message explicitly. // Edit_TakeFocus - Forces a single-line edit control to receive keyboard focus. You can use this macro or send the EM_TAKEFOCUS message explicitly. // Edit_Undo - Undoes the last operation in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_UNDO message explicitly. // EDITSTREAMCALLBACK - The EditStreamCallback function is an application defined callback function used with the EM_STREAMIN and EM_STREAMOUT messages. // EDITWORDBREAKPROCA - An application-defined callback function used with the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message. (ANSI) // EDITWORDBREAKPROCEX - The EditWordBreakProcEx function is an application defined callback function used with the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROCEX message. // EDITWORDBREAKPROCW - An application-defined callback function used with the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message. (Unicode) // EnableScrollBar - The EnableScrollBar function enables or disables one or both scroll bar arrows. // EnableThemeDialogTexture - Enables or disables the visual style of the background of a dialog window. // EnableTheming - Windows Vista through Windows 7:_Enables or disables visual styles for the current user in the current and later sessions.Windows 8 and later:_This function does nothing. Visual styles are always enabled in Windows 8 and later. // EncodeFunction - Encodes an object, given a set of argument strings. // EndBufferedAnimation - Renders the first frame of a buffered animation operation and starts the animation timer. // EndBufferedPaint - Completes a buffered paint operation and frees the associated buffered paint handle. // EndDrag - Ends a drag operation. (IImageList.EndDrag) // EndEditCollection - Turns off edit collection (also called undo grouping). // EndKey - Mimics the functionality of the End key. // EndOf - Moves this range's ends to the end of the last overlapping Unit in the range. // EndPanningFeedback - Terminates any existing animation that was in process or set up by BeginPanningFeedback and UpdatePanningFeedback. // EvaluateProximityToPolygon - Returns the score of a polygon as the probable touch target (compared to all other polygons that intersect the touch contact area) and an adjusted touch point within the polygon. // EvaluateProximityToRect - Returns the score of a rectangle as the probable touch target, compared to all other rectangles that intersect the touch contact area, and an adjusted touch point within the rectangle. // Expand - Expands this range so that any partial units it contains are completely contained. // Find - Searches for math inline functions in text as specified by a source range. // FindText - Searches up to Count characters for the text given by bstr. The starting position and direction are also specified by Count, and the matching criteria are given by Flags. // FindTextEnd - Searches up to Count characters for the string, bstr, starting from the range's End cp. // FindTextStart - Searches up to Count characters for the string, bstr, starting at the range's Start cp (cpFirst). // FIRST_IPADDRESS - Extracts the field 0 value from a packed IP address retrieved with the IPM_GETADDRESS message. // FlatSB_EnableScrollBar - Enables or disables one or both // flat scroll bar direction buttons. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard EnableScrollBar function. // FlatSB_GetScrollInfo - Gets the information for a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard GetScrollInfo function. // FlatSB_GetScrollPos - Gets the thumb position in a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard GetScrollPos function. // FlatSB_GetScrollProp - Gets the properties for a flat scroll bar. This function can also be used to determine if InitializeFlatSB has been called for this window. // FlatSB_GetScrollPropPtr - Gets the properties for a flat scroll bar. // FlatSB_GetScrollRange - Gets the scroll range for a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard GetScrollRange function. // FlatSB_SetScrollInfo - Sets the information for a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard SetScrollInfo function. // FlatSB_SetScrollPos - Sets the current position of the thumb in a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard SetScrollPos function. // FlatSB_SetScrollProp - Sets the properties for a flat scroll bar. // FlatSB_SetScrollRange - Sets the scroll range of a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard SetScrollRange function. // FlatSB_ShowScrollBar - Shows or hides a flat scroll bar. If flat scroll bars are not initialized for the window, this function calls the standard ShowScrollBar function. // ForceImagePresent - Forces an image present, as specified. // FORWARD_WM_NOTIFY - Sends or posts the WM_NOTIFY message. // FOURTH_IPADDRESS - Extracts the field 3 value from a packed IP address retrieved with the IPM_GETADDRESS message. // Freeze - Increments the freeze count. // GetActive - Sets the active state of a story. (ITextStory.// GetActive) // GetActiveStory - Gets the active story; that is, the story that receives keyboard and mouse input. // GetAlignment - Retrieves the current paragraph alignment value. // GetAlignment - Gets the horizontal alignment of a row. // GetAllCaps - Gets whether the characters are all uppercase. // GetAnimation - Gets the animation type. // GetAutoLigatures - Gets whether support for automatic ligatures is active. // GetAutospaceAlpha - Gets the East Asian "autospace alphabetics" state. // GetAutospaceNumeric - Gets the East Asian "autospace numeric" state. // GetAutospaceParens - Gets the East Asian "autospace parentheses" state. // GetBackColor - Gets the text background (highlight) color. // GetBkColor - Gets the current background color for an image list. // GetBold - Gets whether the characters are bold. // GetBorders - Gets the borders collection. // GetBoundaryRectangle - Retrieves the bounding rectangle of a windowless rich edit control. // GetBufferedPaintBits - Retrieves a pointer to the buffer bitmap if the buffer is a device-independent bitmap (DIB). // GetBufferedPaintDC - Gets the paint device context (DC). This is the same value retrieved by BeginBufferedPaint. // GetBufferedPaintTargetDC - Retrieves the target device context (DC). // GetBufferedPaintTargetRect - Retrieves the target rectangle specified by BeginBufferedPaint. // GetCallback - Gets an image list callback object. // GetCallManager - Gets the call manager. // GetCaretType - Gets the caret type. // GetCch - Gets the count of characters in a range. // GetCch - Gets the count of characters for a selected string index. // GetCellAlignment - Gets the vertical alignment of the active cell. // GetCellBorderColors - Gets the border colors of the active cell. // GetCellBorderWidths - Gets the border widths of the active cell. // GetCellColorBack - Gets the background color of the active cell. // GetCellColorFore - Gets the foreground color of the active cell. // GetCellCount - Gets the count of cells in this row. // GetCellCountCache - Gets the count of cells cached for this row. // GetCellIndex - Gets the index of the active cell to get or set parameters for. // GetCellMargin - Gets the cell margin of this row. // GetCellMergeFlags - Gets the merge flags of the active cell. // GetCells - Gets a cells object with the parameters of cells in the currently selected table row or column. // GetCellShading - Gets the shading of the active cell. // GetCellVerticalText - Gets the vertical-text setting of the active cell. // GetCellWidth - Gets the width of the active cell. // GetChar - Gets the character at the start position of the range. // GetChar2 - Gets the character at the specified offset from the end of this range. // GetCharRep - Gets the character repertoire (writing system). // GetCIMSSM - Retrieves the source of the input message (GetCurrentInputMessageSourceInSendMessage). // GetClientRect - Retrieves the client rectangle of the rich edit control. // GetClientSite - Retrieves an IOleClientSite interface to be used when creating a new object. All objects inserted into a rich edit control must use client site interfaces returned by this function. A client site may be used with exactly one object. // GetClipboardData - Retrieves a clipboard object for a range in an edit control. // GetClipboardData - Allows the client to supply its own clipboard object. // GetColumn - Gets the column properties for the currently selected column. // GetComboBoxInfo - Retrieves information about the specified combo box. // GetCompressionMode - Gets the East Asian compression mode. // GetContextMenu - Queries the application for a context menu to use on a right-click event. // GetCookie - Gets the client cookie. // GetCount - Gets the count of extra properties in this character formatting collection. // GetCount - Gets the count of subranges, including the active subrange in the current range. // GetCount - Retrieves the number of stories in the specified stories collection. // GetCount - Gets the number of strings in a string collection. // GetCurrentInputMessageSource - Retrieves the source of the input message. // GetCurrentThemeName - Retrieves the name of the current visual style, and optionally retrieves the color scheme name and size name. // GetDefaultTabStop - Gets the default tab width. // GetDisplay - Gets a new display for a story. // GetDisplays - Gets the displays collection for this Text Object Model (TOM) engine instance. // GetDocumentFont - Gets an object that provides the default character format information for this instance of the Text Object Model (TOM) engine. // GetDocumentPara - Gets an object that provides the default paragraph format information for this instance of the Text Object Model (TOM) engine. // GetDoubleStrike - Gets whether characters are displayed with double horizontal lines through the center. // GetDragDropEffect - Allows the client to specify the effects of a drop operation. // GetDragImage - Gets the temporary image list that is used for the drag image. The function also retrieves the current drag position and the offset of the drag image relative to the drag position. // GetDropCap - Gets the drop-cap parameters of the paragraph that contains this range. // GetDuplicate - Gets a duplicate of this text font object. // GetDuplicate - Creates a duplicate of the specified paragraph format object. The duplicate property is the default property of an ITextPara object. // GetDuplicate - Gets a duplicate of this range object. // GetDuplicate2 - Gets a duplicate of this character format object. // GetDuplicate2 - Gets a duplicate of this text paragraph format object. // GetDuplicate2 - Gets a duplicate of a range object. // GetEastAsianFlags - Gets the East Asian flags. // GetEffectColor - Retrieves the color used for special text attributes. // GetEffectiveClientRect - Calculates the dimensions of a rectangle in the client area that contains all the specified controls. // GetEffects - Gets the character format effects. // GetEffects - Gets the paragraph format effects. // GetEffects2 - Gets the additional character format effects. // GetEmbeddedObject - Retrieves a pointer to the embedded object at the start of the specified range, that is, at cpFirst. The range must either be an insertion point or it must select only the embedded object. // GetEmboss - Gets whether characters are embossed. // GetEnd - Gets the end character position of the range. // GetEngrave - Gets whether characters are displayed as imprinted characters. // GetFirstLineIndent - Retrieves the amount used to indent the first line of a paragraph relative to the left indent. The left indent is the indent for all lines of the paragraph except the first line. // GetFlags - Gets the text selection flags. // GetFont - Gets an ITextFont object with the character attributes of the specified range. // GetFont2 - Gets an ITextFont2 object with the character attributes of the current range. // GetFontAlignment - Gets the paragraph font alignment state. // GetForeColor - Gets the foreground, or text, color. // GetFormattedText - Gets an ITextRange object with the specified range's formatted text. // GetFormattedText2 - Gets an ITextRange2 object with the current range's formatted text. // GetGenerator - Gets the name of the Text Object Model (TOM) engine. // GetGravity - Gets the gravity of this range. // GetHangingPunctuation - Gets whether to hang punctuation symbols on the right margin when the paragraph is justified. // GetHeight - Gets the height of the row. // GetHidden - Gets whether characters are hidden. // GetHyphenation - Determines whether automatic hyphenation is enabled for the range. // GetIcon - Creates an icon from an image and a mask in an image list. // GetIconSize - Gets the dimensions of images in an image list. All images in an image list have the same dimensions. // GetImageCount - Gets the number of images in an image list. // GetImageInfo - Gets information about an image. // GetImageRect - Gets an image's bounding rectangle. // GetImmContext - Gets the Input Method Manager (IMM) input context from the Text Object Model (TOM) host. // GetIndent - Gets the indent of this row. // GetIndex - Retrieves the story index of the Unit parameter at the specified range Start character position. // GetIndex - Gets the index of a story. // GetInlineObject - Gets the properties of the inline object at the range active end. // GetInPlaceContext - Provides the application and document-level interfaces and information required to support in-place activation. // GetItalic - Gets whether characters are in italics. // GetItemFlags - Gets the flags of an image. // GetKeepTogether - Determines whether page breaks are allowed within paragraphs. // GetKeepTogether - Gets whether this row is allowed to be broken across pages. // GetKeepWithNext - Determines whether page breaks are allowed between paragraphs in the range. // GetKeepWithNext - Gets whether this row should appear on the same page as the row that follows it. // GetKerning - Gets the minimum font size at which kerning occurs. // GetLanguageID - Gets the language ID or language code identifier (LCID). // GetLeftIndent - Retrieves the distance used to indent all lines except the first line of a paragraph. The distance is relative to the left margin. // GetLineSpacing - Retrieves the line-spacing value for the text range. // GetLineSpacingRule - Retrieves the line-spacing rule for the text range. // GetLinkCount - Returns the number of objects in a rich edit control that are links. // GetLinkType - Gets the link type. // GetListAlignment - Retrieves the kind of alignment to use for bulleted and numbered lists. // GetListBoxInfo - Retrieves the number of items per column in a specified list box. // GetListLevelIndex - Retrieves the list level index used with paragraphs. // GetListStart - Retrieves the starting value or code of a list numbering sequence. // GetListTab - Retrieves the list tab setting, which is the distance between the first-line indent and the text on the first line. The numbered or bulleted text is left-justified, centered, or right-justified at the first-line indent value. // GetListType - Retrieves the kind of numbering to use with paragraphs. // GetMainStory - Gets the main story. // GetMathFunctionType - Retrieves the math function type associated with the specified math function name. // GetMathProperties - Gets the math properties for the document. // GetMathZone - Gets whether a math zone is active. // GetModWidthPairs - Gets whether "decrease widths on pairs" is active. // GetModWidthSpace - Gets whether "increase width of whitespace" is active. // GetMUILanguage - Gets the language currently in use by the common controls for a particular process. // GetName - Gets the file name of this document. This is the ITextDocument default property. // GetName - Gets the font name. // GetNestLevel - Gets the nest level of a table. // GetNewStorage - Provides storage for a new object pasted from the clipboard or read in from an Rich Text Format (RTF) stream. // GetNewStory - Gets a new story. // GetNoLineNumber - Determines whether paragraph numbering is enabled. // GetNotificationMode - Gets the notification mode. // GetObject - Retrieves information, stored in a REOBJECT structure, about an object in a rich edit control. // GetObjectCount - Returns the number of objects currently contained in a rich edit control. // GetOldNumbers - Gets whether old-style numbers are active. // GetOriginalSize - Gets the original size of a specified image. // GetOutline - Gets whether characters are displayed as outlined characters. // GetOverlapping - Gets whether overlapping text is active. // GetOverlayImage - Retrieves a specified image from the list of images used as overlay masks. // GetPageBreakBefore - Determines whether each paragraph in the range must begin on a new page. // GetPara - Gets an ITextPara object with the paragraph attributes of the specified range. // GetPara2 - Gets an ITextPara2 object with the paragraph attributes of a range. // GetPoint - Retrieves screen coordinates for the start or end character position in the text range, along with the intra-line position. // GetPointerDevice - Gets information about the pointer device. // GetPointerDeviceCursors - Gets the cursor IDs that are mapped to the cursors associated with a pointer device. // GetPointerDeviceProperties - Gets device properties that aren't included in the POINTER_DEVICE_INFO structure. // GetPointerDeviceRects - Gets the x and y range for the pointer device (in himetric) and the x and y range (current resolution) for the display that the pointer device is mapped to. // GetPointerDevices - Gets information about the pointer devices attached to the system. // GetPosition - Gets the amount that characters are offset vertically relative to the baseline. // GetPositionSubSuper - Gets the subscript or superscript position relative to the baseline. // GetPreferredFont - Retrieves the preferred font for a particular character repertoire and character position. // GetProperty - Retrieves the value of a property. // GetProperty - Gets the value of the specified property. (ITextFont2.GetProperty) // GetProperty - Gets the value of the specified property. (ITextPara2.GetProperty) // GetProperty - Gets the value of a property. // GetProperty - Gets the value of the specified property. (ITextRow.GetProperty) // GetProperty - Gets the value of the specified property. (ITextStory.GetProperty) // GetPropertyInfo - Gets the property type and value of the specified extra property. // GetPropertyOverrideValue - Retrieves the host container's override value for the specified Microsoft UI Automation accessibility property of a windowless rich edit control. // GetProtected - Gets whether characters are protected against attempts to modify them. // GetRange - Gets a text range object for the story. // GetRawPointerDeviceData - Gets the raw input data from the pointer device. // GetRect - Retrieves a rectangle of the specified type for the current range. // GetRightIndent - Retrieves the size of the right margin indent of a paragraph. // GetRow - Gets the row properties in the currently selected row. // GetRTL - Gets whether this row has right-to-left orientation. // GetSaved - Gets a value that indicates whether changes have been made since the file was last saved. // GetScaling - Gets the font horizontal scaling percentage. // GetScrollBarInfo - The GetScrollBarInfo function retrieves information about the specified scroll bar. // GetScrollInfo - The GetScrollInfo function retrieves the parameters of a scroll bar, including the minimum and maximum scrolling positions, the page size, and the position of the scroll box (thumb). // GetScrollPos - The GetScrollPos function retrieves the current position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar. // GetScrollRange - The GetScrollRange function retrieves the current minimum and maximum scroll box (thumb) positions for the specified scroll bar. // GetSelection - Gets the active selection. (ITextDocument.GetSelection) // GetSelection2 - Gets the active selection. (ITextDocument2.GetSelection2) // GetShadow - Gets whether characters are displayed as shadowed characters. // GetSize - Gets the font size. (ITextFont.GetSize) // GetSmallCaps - Gets whether characters are in small capital letters. // GetSnapToGrid - Gets whether paragraph lines snap to a vertical grid that could be defined for the whole document. // GetSpaceAfter - Retrieves the amount of vertical space below a paragraph. // GetSpaceBefore - Retrieves the amount of vertical space above a paragraph. // GetSpaceExtension - Gets the East Asian space extension value. // GetSpacing - Gets the amount of horizontal spacing between characters. // GetStart - Gets the start character position of the range. // GetStartPara - Gets the character position of the start of the paragraph that contains the range's start character position. // GetStatistics - Gets an image list statistics structure. // GetStory - Retrieves the story that corresponds to a particular index. // GetStoryCount - Gets the count of stories in this document. // GetStoryLength - Gets the count of characters in the range's story. // GetStoryRanges - Gets the story collection object used to enumerate the stories in a document. // GetStoryRanges2 - Gets an object for enumerating the stories in a document. // GetStoryType - Get the type of the range's story. // GetStrikeThrough - Gets whether characters are displayed with a horizontal line through the center. // GetStrings - Gets a collection of rich-text strings. // GetStyle - Gets the character style handle of the characters in a range. // GetStyle - Retrieves the style handle to the paragraphs in the specified range. // GetSubrange - Retrieves a subrange in a range. // GetSubscript - Gets whether characters are displayed as subscript. // GetSuperscript - Gets whether characters are displayed as superscript. // GetTab - Retrieves tab parameters (displacement, alignment, and leader style) for a specified tab. // GetTabCount - Retrieves the tab count. // GetTable - Gets the table properties in the currently selected table. // GetText - Gets the plain text in this range. The Text property is the default property of the ITextRange interface. // GetText - Gets the text in a story according to the specified conversion flags. // GetText2 - Gets the text in this range according to the specified conversion flags. // GetThemeAnimationProperty - Gets a theme animation property based on the storyboard id and the target id. // GetThemeAnimationTransform - Gets an animation transform operation based on storyboard id, target id and transform index. // GetThemeAppProperties - Retrieves the property flags that control how visual styles are applied in the current application. // GetThemeBackgroundContentRect - Retrieves the size of the content area for the background defined by the visual style. // GetThemeBackgroundExtent - Calculates the size and location of the background, defined by the visual style, given the content area. // GetThemeBackgroundRegion - Computes the region for a regular or partially transparent background that is bounded by a specified rectangle. // GetThemeBitmap - Retrieves the bitmap associated with a particular theme, part, state, and property. // GetThemeBool - Retrieves the value of a BOOL property from the SysMetrics section of theme data. // GetThemeColor - Retrieves the value of a color property. // GetThemeDocumentationProperty - Retrieves the value for a theme property from the documentation section of the specified theme file. // GetThemeEnumValue - Retrieves the value of an enumerated type property. // GetThemeFilename - Retrieves the value of a filename property. // GetThemeFont - Retrieves the value of a font property. // GetThemeInt - Retrieves the value of an int property. // GetThemeIntList - Retrieves a list of int data from a visual style. // GetThemeMargins - Retrieves the value of a MARGINS property. // GetThemeMetric - Retrieves the value of a metric property. // GetThemePartSize - Calculates the original size of the part defined by a visual style. // GetThemePosition - Retrieves the value of a position property. // GetThemePropertyOrigin - Retrieves the location of the theme property definition for a property. // GetThemeRect - Retrieves the value of a RECT property. // GetThemeStream - Retrieves a data stream corresponding to a specified theme, starting from a specified part, state, and property. // GetThemeString - Retrieves the value of a string property. // GetThemeSysBool - Retrieves the Boolean value of a system metric. // GetThemeSysColor - Retrieves the value of a system color. // GetThemeSysColorBrush - Retrieves a system color brush. // GetThemeSysFont - Retrieves the LOGFONT of a system font. // GetThemeSysInt - Retrieves the value of a system int. // GetThemeSysSize - Retrieves the value of a system size metric from theme data. // GetThemeSysString - Retrieves the value of a system string. // GetThemeTextExtent - Calculates the size and location of the specified text when rendered in the visual style font. // GetThemeTextMetrics - Retrieves information about the font specified by a visual style for a particular part. // GetThemeTimingFunction - Gets a predefined timing function based on a timing function identifier. // GetThemeTransitionDuration - Gets the duration for the specified transition. // GetTrimPunctuationAtStart - Gets whether to trim the leading space of a punctuation symbol at the start of a line. // GetType - Gets the type of text selection. // GetType - Gets this story's type. // GetTypographyOptions - Gets the typography options. // GetUnderline - Gets the type of underlining for the characters in a range. // GetUnderlinePositionMode - Gets the underline position mode. // GetURL - Returns the URL text associated with a range. // GetVersion - Gets the version number of the Text Object Model (TOM) engine. // GetWeight - Gets the font weight for the characters in a range. // GetWidowControl - Retrieves the widow and orphan control state for the paragraphs in a range. // GetWindow - Gets the handle of the window that the Text Object Model (TOM) engine is using to display output. // GetWindowFeedbackSetting - Retrieves the feedback configuration for a window. // GetWindowTheme - Retrieves a theme handle to a window that has visual styles applied. // HANDLE_WM_NOTIFY - Calls a function that processes the WM_NOTIFY message. // HandsOffStorage - Indicates when a rich edit control is to release its reference to the storage interface associated with the specified object. This call does not call the object's IRichEditOle::HandsOffStorage method; the caller must do that. // Header_ClearAllFilters - Clears all of the filters for a given header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_CLEARFILTER message explicitly. // Header_ClearFilter - Clears the filter for a given header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_CLEARFILTER message explicitly. // Header_CreateDragImage - Creates a transparent version of an item image within an existing header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE message explicitly. // Header_DeleteItem - Deletes an item from a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_DELETEITEM message explicitly. // Header_EditFilter - Moves the input focus to the edit box when a filter button has the focus. // Header_GetBitmapMargin - Gets the width of the margin (in pixels) of a bitmap in an existing header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETBITMAPMARGIN message explicitly. // Header_GetFocusedItem - Gets the item in a header control that has the focus. Use this macro or send the HDM_GETFOCUSEDITEM message explicitly. // Header_GetImageList - Gets the handle to the image list that has been set for an existing header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // Header_GetItem - Gets information about an item in a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETITEM message explicitly. // Header_GetItemCount - Gets a count of the items in a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETITEMCOUNT message explicitly. // Header_GetItemDropDownRect - Gets the coordinates of the drop-down button for a specified item in a header control. The header control must be of type HDF_SPLITBUTTON. Use this macro or send the HDM_GETITEMDROPDOWNRECT message explicitly. // Header_GetItemRect - Gets the bounding rectangle for a given item in a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // Header_GetOrderArray - Gets the current left-to-right order of items in a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETORDERARRAY message explicitly. // Header_GetOverflowRect - Gets the coordinates of the drop-down overflow area for a specified header control. The header control must be of type HDF_SPLITBUTTON. Use this macro or send the HDM_GETOVERFLOWRECT message explicitly. // Header_GetStateImageList - Gets the handle to the image list that has been set for an existing header control state. // Header_GetUnicodeFormat - Gets the Unicode character format flag for the control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_GETUNICODEFORMAT message explicitly. // Header_InsertItem - Inserts a new item into a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_INSERTITEM message explicitly. // Header_Layout - Retrieves the correct size and position of a header control within the parent window. You can use this macro or send the HDM_LAYOUT message explicitly. // Header_OrderToIndex - Retrieves an index value for an item based on its order in the header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_ORDERTOINDEX message explicitly. // Header_SetBitmapMargin - Sets the width of the margin for a bitmap in an existing header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_SETBITMAPMARGIN message explicitly. // Header_SetFilterChangeTimeout - Sets the timeout interval between the time a change takes place in the filter attributes and the posting of an HDN_FILTERCHANGE notification. You can use this macro or send the HDM_SETFILTERCHANGETIMEOUT message explicitly. // Header_SetFocusedItem - Sets the focus to a specified item in a header control. Use this macro or send the HDM_SETFOCUSEDITEM message explicitly. // Header_SetHotDivider - Changes the color of a divider between header items to indicate the destination of an external drag-and-drop operation. You can use this macro or send the HDM_SETHOTDIVIDER message explicitly. // Header_SetImageList - Assigns an image list to an existing header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_SETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // Header_SetItem - Sets the attributes of the specified item in a header control. You can use this macro or send the HDM_SETITEM message explicitly. // Header_SetOrderArray - Sets the left-to-right order of header items. You can use this macro or send the HDM_SETORDERARRAY message explicitly. // Header_SetStateImageList - Assigns an image list to an existing header control state. // Header_SetUnicodeFormat - Sets the UNICODE character format flag for the control. // HexToUnicode - Converts and replaces the hexadecimal number at the end of this range to a Unicode character. // HIMAGELIST_QueryInterface - Retrieves a pointer to an IImageList or IImageList2 object that corresponds to the image list's HIMAGELIST handle. // HitTestThemeBackground - Retrieves a hit test code for a point in the background specified by a visual style. // HomeKey - Generalizes the functionality of the Home key. // HyphenateProc - The HyphenateProc function is an application�defined callback function used with the EM_SETHYPHENATEINFO message. It determines how hyphenation is done in a Microsoft Rich Edit control. // ImageList_Add - Adds an image or images to an image list. (ImageList_Add) // ImageList_AddIcon - Adds an icon or cursor to an image list. ImageList_AddIcon calls the ImageList_ReplaceIcon function. // ImageList_AddMasked - Adds an image or images to an image list, generating a mask from the specified bitmap. (ImageList_AddMasked) // ImageList_BeginDrag - Begins dragging an image. (ImageList_BeginDrag) // ImageList_CoCreateInstance - Creates a single instance of an imagelist and returns an interface pointer to it. // ImageList_Copy - Copies images within a given image list. // ImageList_Create - Creates a new image list. // ImageList_Destroy - Destroys an image list. // ImageList_DragEnter - Displays the drag image at the specified position within the window. // ImageList_DragLeave - Unlocks the specified window and hides the drag image, allowing the window to be updated. // ImageList_DragMove - Moves the image that is being dragged during a drag-and-drop operation. This function is typically called in response to a WM_MOUSEMOVE message. (ImageList_DragMove) // ImageList_DragShowNolock - Shows or hides the image being dragged. (ImageList_DragShowNolock) // ImageList_Draw - Draws an image list item in the specified device context. (ImageList_Draw) // ImageList_DrawEx - Draws an image list item in the specified device context. The function uses the specified drawing style and blends the image with the specified color. // ImageList_DrawIndirect - Draws an image list image based on an IMAGELISTDRAWPARAMS structure. // ImageList_Duplicate - Creates a duplicate of an existing image list. // ImageList_EndDrag - Ends a drag operation. (ImageList_EndDrag) // ImageList_ExtractIcon - Calls the ImageList_GetIcon function to create an icon or cursor based on an image and mask in an image list. // ImageList_GetBkColor - Retrieves the current background color for an image list. // ImageList_GetDragImage - Retrieves the temporary image list that is used for the drag image. The function also retrieves the current drag position and the offset of the drag image relative to the drag position. // ImageList_GetIcon - Creates an icon from an image and mask in an image list. // ImageList_GetIconSize - Retrieves the dimensions of images in an image list. All images in an image list have the same dimensions. // ImageList_GetImageCount - Retrieves the number of images in an image list. // ImageList_GetImageInfo - Retrieves information about an image. // ImageList_LoadBitmap - Calls the ImageList_LoadImage function to create an image list from the specified bitmap resource. // ImageList_LoadImageA - Creates an image list from the specified bitmap. (ANSI) // ImageList_LoadImageW - Creates an image list from the specified bitmap. (Unicode) // ImageList_Merge - Creates a new image by combining two existing images. The function also creates a new image list in which to store the image. // ImageList_Read - Reads an image list from a stream. // ImageList_ReadEx - Reads an image list from a stream, and returns an IImageList interface to the image list. // ImageList_Remove - Removes an image from an image list. (ImageList_Remove) // ImageList_RemoveAll - Calls the ImageList_Remove function to remove all of the images from an image list. // ImageList_Replace - Replaces an image in an image list with a new image. (ImageList_Replace) // ImageList_ReplaceIcon - Replaces an image with an icon or cursor. (ImageList_ReplaceIcon) // ImageList_SetBkColor - Sets the background color for an image list. This function only works if you add an icon or use ImageList_AddMasked with a black and white bitmap. Without a mask, the entire image is drawn; hence the background color is not visible. // ImageList_SetDragCursorImage - Creates a new drag image by combining the specified image (typically a mouse cursor image) with the current drag image. // ImageList_SetIconSize - Sets the dimensions of images in an image list and removes all images from the list. (ImageList_SetIconSize) // ImageList_SetImageCount - Resizes an existing image list. (ImageList_SetImageCount) // ImageList_SetOverlayImage - Adds a specified image to the list of images to be used as overlay masks. An image list can have up to four overlay masks in version 4.70 and earlier and up to 15 in version 4.71. The function assigns an overlay mask index to the specified image. // ImageList_Write - Writes an image list to a stream. (ImageList_Write) // ImageList_WriteEx - Writes an image list to a stream. (ImageList_WriteEx) // ImportDataObject - Imports a clipboard object into a rich edit control, replacing the current selection. // INDEXTOOVERLAYMASK - Prepares the index of an overlay mask so that the ImageList_Draw function can use it. // INDEXTOSTATEIMAGEMASK - Prepares the index of a state image so that a tree-view control or list-view control can use the index to retrieve the state image for an item. // InitCommonControls - Registers and initializes certain common control window classes. This function is obsolete. New applications should use the InitCommonControlsEx function. // InitCommonControlsEx - Ensures that the common control DLL (Comctl32.dll) is loaded, and registers specific common control classes from the DLL. An application must call this function before creating a common control. // Initialize - Initializes an image list. // InitializeFlatSB - Initializes flat scroll bars for a particular window. // InitializeTouchInjection - Configures the touch injection context for the calling application and initializes the maximum number of simultaneous contacts that the app can inject. // InitMUILanguage - Enables an application to specify a language to be used with the common controls that is different from the system language. // InjectSyntheticPointerInput - Simulates pointer input (pen or touch). // InjectTouchInput - Simulates touch input. // InPlaceDeactivate - Indicates when a rich edit control is to deactivate the currently active in-place object, if any. // InRange - Determines whether this range is within or at the same text as a specified range. // Insert - Inserts a row, or rows, at the location identified by the associated ITextRange2 object. // InsertImage - Inserts an image into this range. // InsertNullStr - Inserts a NULL string in the collection at a selected string index. // InsertObject - Inserts an object into a rich edit control. // InsertTable - Inserts a table in a range. // InStory - Determines whether this range's story is the same as a specified range's story. // IsAppThemed - Reports whether the current application's user interface displays using visual styles. // IsCompositionActive - Determines whether Desktop Window Manager (DWM) composition effects are available to the theme. // IsDlgButtonChecked - The IsDlgButtonChecked function determines whether a button control is checked or whether a three-state button control is checked, unchecked, or indeterminate. // IsEqual - Determines whether this text font object has the same properties as the specified text font object. (ITextFont.IsEqual) // IsEqual - Determines if the current range has the same properties as a specified range. // IsEqual - Determines whether this range has the same character positions and story as those of a specified range. // IsEqual - Compares two table rows to determine if they have the same properties. // IsEqual2 - Determines whether this text font object has the same properties as the specified text font object. (ITextFont2.IsEqual2) // IsEqual2 - Determines whether this text paragraph object has the same properties as the specified text paragraph object. // IsThemeActive - Tests if a visual style for the current application is active. // IsThemeBackgroundPartiallyTransparent - Retrieves whether the background specified by the visual style has transparent pieces or alpha-blended pieces. // IsThemeDialogTextureEnabled - Reports whether a specified dialog window supports background texturing. // IsThemePartDefined - Retrieves whether a visual style has defined parameters for the specified part and state. // IsVisible - Indicates whether a windowless rich edit control is currently visible. // Item - Retrieves an ITextRange object for the Indexth story in this story collection. // Item - Gets an ITextRange2 object for a selected index in a string collection. // Item2 - Gets an ITextRange2 object for a story, by index, in a stories collection. // LBItemFromPt - Retrieves the index of the item at the specified point in a list box. // Linearize - Translates the built-up math, ruby, and other inline objects in this range to linearized form. // ListBox_AddItemData - Adds item data to the list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_AddString - Adds a string to a list box. // ListBox_DeleteString - Deletes the item at the specified location in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_Dir - Adds names to the list displayed by a list box. // ListBox_Enable - Enables or disables a list box control. // ListBox_FindItemData - Finds the first item in a list box that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_FindString - Finds the first string in a list box that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_FindStringExact - Finds the first list box string that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetCaretIndex - Retrieves the index of the list box item that has the focus rectangle in a multiple-selection list box. The item may or may not be selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ListBox_GetCount - Gets the number of items in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetCurSel - Gets the index of the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent - Gets the width that a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width) if the list box has a horizontal scroll bar. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetItemData - Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ListBox_GetItemHeight - Retrieves the height of items in a list box. // ListBox_GetItemRect - Gets the dimensions of the rectangle that bounds a list box item as it is currently displayed in the list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetSel - Gets the selection state of an item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_GetSelCount - Gets the count of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELCOUNT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetSelItems - Gets the indexes of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELITEMS message explicitly. // ListBox_GetText - Gets a string from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXT message explicitly. // ListBox_GetTextLen - Gets the length of a string in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ListBox_GetTopIndex - Gets the index of the first visible item in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ListBox_InsertItemData - Inserts item data to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_InsertString - Adds a string to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_ResetContent - Removes all items from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ListBox_SelectItemData - Searches a list box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_SelectString - Searches a list box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ListBox_SelItemRange - Selects or deselects one or more consecutive items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELITEMRANGE message explicitly. // ListBox_SetCaretIndex - Sets the focus rectangle to the item at the specified index in a multiple-selection list box. If the item is not visible, it is scrolled into view. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ListBox_SetColumnWidth - Sets the width of all columns in a multiple-column list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message explicitly. // ListBox_SetCurSel - Sets the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent - Set the width by which a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width). // ListBox_SetItemData - Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ListBox_SetItemHeight - Sets the height of items in a list box. // ListBox_SetSel - Selects or deselects an item in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETSEL message explicitly. // ListBox_SetTabStops - Sets the tab-stop positions in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // ListBox_SetTopIndex - Ensures that the specified item in a list box is visible. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ListView_ApproximateViewRect - Calculates the approximate width and height required to display a given number of items. You can use this macro or send the LVM_APPROXIMATEVIEWRECT message explicitly. // ListView_Arrange - Arranges items in icon view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_ARRANGE message explicitly. // ListView_CancelEditLabel - Cancels an item text editing operation. You can use this macro or send the LVM_CANCELEDITLABEL message explicitly. // ListView_CreateDragImage - Creates a drag image list for the specified item. You can use this macro or send the LVM_CREATEDRAGIMAGE message explicitly. // ListView_DeleteAllItems - Removes all items from a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_DELETEALLITEMS message explicitly. // ListView_DeleteColumn - Removes a column from a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_DELETECOLUMN message explicitly. // ListView_DeleteItem - Removes an item from a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_DELETEITEM message explicitly. // ListView_EditLabel - Begins in-place editing of the specified list-view item's text. The message implicitly selects and focuses the specified item. You can use this macro or send the LVM_EDITLABEL message explicitly. // ListView_EnableGroupView - Enables or disables whether the items in a list-view control display as a group. You can use this macro or send the LVM_ENABLEGROUPVIEW message explicitly. // ListView_EnsureVisible - Ensures that a list-view item is either entirely or partially visible, scrolling the list-view control if necessary. You can use this macro or send the LVM_ENSUREVISIBLE message explicitly. // ListView_FindItem - Searches for a list-view item with the specified characteristics. You can use this macro or send the LVM_FINDITEM message explicitly. // ListView_GetBkColor - Gets the background color of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETBKCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_GetBkImage - Gets the background image in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETBKIMAGE message explicitly. // ListView_GetCallbackMask - Gets the callback mask for a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETCALLBACKMASK message explicitly. // ListView_GetCheckState - Determines if an item in a list-view control is selected. This should be used only for list-view controls that have the LVS_EX_CHECKBOXES style. // ListView_GetColumn - Gets the attributes of a list-view control's column. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETCOLUMN message explicitly. // ListView_GetColumnOrderArray - Gets the current left-to-right order of columns in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETCOLUMNORDERARRAY message explicitly. // ListView_GetColumnWidth - Gets the width of a column in report or list view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETCOLUMNWIDTH message explicitly. // ListView_GetCountPerPage - Calculates the number of items that can fit vertically in the visible area of a list-view control when in list or report view. Only fully visible items are counted. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETCOUNTPERPAGE message explicitly. // ListView_GetEditControl - Gets the handle to the edit control being used to edit a list-view item's text. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETEDITCONTROL message explicitly. // ListView_GetEmptyText - Gets the text meant for display when the list-view control appears empty. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETEMPTYTEXT message explicitly. // ListView_GetExtendedListViewStyle - Gets the extended styles that are currently in use for a given list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE message explicitly. // ListView_GetFocusedGroup - Gets the group that has the focus. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETFOCUSEDGROUP message explicitly. // ListView_GetFooterInfo - Gets information on the footer of a specified list-view control. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETFOOTERINFO message explicitly. // ListView_GetFooterItem - Gets information on a footer item for a specified list-view control. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETFOOTERITEM message explicitly. // ListView_GetFooterItemRect - Gets the coordinates of a footer for a specified item in a list-view control. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETFOOTERITEMRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetFooterRect - Gets the coordinates of the footer for a specified list-view control. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETFOOTERRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetGroupCount - Gets the number of groups. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETGROUPCOUNT message explicitly. // ListView_GetGroupHeaderImageList - Gets the group header image list that has been set for an existing list-view control. // ListView_GetGroupInfo - Gets group information. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETGROUPINFO message explicitly. // ListView_GetGroupInfoByIndex - Gets information on a specified group. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETGROUPINFOBYINDEX message explicitly. // ListView_GetGroupMetrics - Gets information about the display of groups. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETGROUPMETRICS message explicitly. // ListView_GetGroupRect - Gets the rectangle for a specified group. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETGROUPRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetGroupState - Gets the state for a specified group. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETGROUPSTATE message explicitly. // ListView_GetHeader - Gets the handle to the header control used by a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETHEADER message explicitly. // ListView_GetHotCursor - Gets the HCURSOR used when the pointer is over an item while hot tracking is enabled. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETHOTCURSOR message explicitly. // ListView_GetHotItem - Gets the index of the hot item. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETHOTITEM message explicitly. // ListView_GetHoverTime - Gets the amount of time that the mouse cursor must hover over an item before it is selected. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETHOVERTIME message explicitly. // ListView_GetImageList - Gets the handle to an image list used for drawing list-view items. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // ListView_GetInsertMark - Gets the position of the insertion point. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETINSERTMARK message explicitly. // ListView_GetInsertMarkColor - Gets the color of the insertion point. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETINSERTMARKCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_GetInsertMarkRect - Gets the rectangle that bounds the insertion point. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETINSERTMARKRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetISearchString - Gets the incremental search string of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETISEARCHSTRING message explicitly. // ListView_GetItem - Gets some or all of a list-view item's attributes. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEM message explicitly. // ListView_GetItemCount - Gets the number of items in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEMCOUNT message explicitly. // ListView_GetItemIndexRect - Gets the bounding rectangle for all or part of a subitem in the current view of a specified list-view control. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEMINDEXRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetItemPosition - Gets the position of a list-view item. You can use this macro or explicitly send the LVM_GETITEMPOSITION message. // ListView_GetItemRect - Gets the bounding rectangle for all or part of an item in the current view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetItemSpacing - Determines the spacing between items in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEMSPACING message explicitly. // ListView_GetItemState - Gets the state of a list-view item. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEMSTATE message explicitly. // ListView_GetItemText - Gets the text of a list-view item or subitem. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETITEMTEXT message explicitly. // ListView_GetNextItem - Searches for a list-view item that has the specified properties and bears the specified relationship to a specified item. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETNEXTITEM message explicitly. // ListView_GetNextItemIndex - Gets the index of the item in a particular list-view control that has the specified properties and relationship to another specific item. Use this macro or send the LVM_GETNEXTITEMINDEX message explicitly. // ListView_GetNumberOfWorkAreas - Gets the number of working areas in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETNUMBEROFWORKAREAS message explicitly. // ListView_GetOrigin - Gets the current view origin for a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETORIGIN message explicitly. // ListView_GetOutlineColor - Gets the color of the border of a list-view control if the LVS_EX_BORDERSELECT extended window style is set. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETOUTLINECOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_GetSelectedColumn - Gets an integer that specifies the selected column. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETSELECTEDCOLUMN message explicitly. // ListView_GetSelectedCount - Determines the number of selected items in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETSELECTEDCOUNT message explicitly. // ListView_GetSelectionMark - Gets the selection mark from a list-view control. You can use this macro or explicitly send the LVM_GETSELECTIONMARK message. // ListView_GetStringWidth - Determines the width of a specified string using the specified list-view control's current font. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETSTRINGWIDTH message explicitly. // ListView_GetSubItemRect - Gets information about the rectangle that surrounds a subitem in a list-view control. // ListView_GetTextBkColor - Gets the text background color of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETTEXTBKCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_GetTextColor - Gets the text color of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETTEXTCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_GetTileInfo - Gets information about a tile in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETTILEINFO message explicitly. // ListView_GetTileViewInfo - Gets information about a list-view control in tile view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETTILEVIEWINFO message explicitly. // ListView_GetToolTips - Gets the tooltip control that the list-view control uses to display tooltips. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETTOOLTIPS message explicitly. // ListView_GetTopIndex - Gets the index of the topmost visible item when in list or report view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ListView_GetUnicodeFormat - Gets the Unicode character format flag for the control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETUNICODEFORMAT message explicitly. // ListView_GetView - Gets the current view of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETVIEW message explicitly. // ListView_GetViewRect - Gets the bounding rectangle of all items in the list-view control. The list view must be in icon or small icon view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_GETVIEWRECT message explicitly. // ListView_GetWorkAreas - Gets the working areas from a list-view control. You can use this macro, or send the LVM_GETWORKAREAS message explicitly. // ListView_HasGroup - Determines whether the list-view control has a specified group. You can use this macro or send the LVM_HASGROUP message explicitly. // ListView_HitTest - Determines which list-view item, if any, is at a specified position. You can use this macro or send the LVM_HITTEST message explicitly. (ListView_HitTest) // ListView_HitTestEx - Determines which list-view item, if any, is at a specified position. You can use this macro or send the LVM_HITTEST message explicitly. (ListView_HitTestEx) // ListView_InsertColumn - Inserts a new column in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_INSERTCOLUMN message explicitly. // ListView_InsertGroup - Inserts a group into a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_INSERTGROUP message explicitly. // ListView_InsertGroupSorted - Inserts a group into an ordered list of groups. You can use this macro or send the LVM_INSERTGROUPSORTED message explicitly. // ListView_InsertItem - Inserts a new item in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_INSERTITEM message explicitly. // ListView_InsertMarkHitTest - Retrieves the insertion point closest to a specified point. You can use this macro or send the LVM_INSERTMARKHITTEST message explicitly. // ListView_IsGroupViewEnabled - Checks whether the list-view control has group view enabled. You can use this macro or send the LVM_ISGROUPVIEWENABLED message explicitly. // ListView_IsItemVisible - Indicates whether an item in the list-view control is visible. Use this macro or send the LVM_ISITEMVISIBLE message explicitly. // ListView_MapIDToIndex - Maps the ID of an item to an index. You can use this macro or send the LVM_MAPIDTOINDEX message explicitly. // ListView_MapIndexToID - Maps the index of an item to a unique ID. You can use this macro or send the LVM_MAPINDEXTOID message explicitly. // ListView_MoveGroup - This macro is not implemented. (ListView_MoveGroup) // ListView_MoveItemToGroup - This macro is not implemented. (ListView_MoveItemToGroup) // ListView_RedrawItems - Forces a list-view control to redraw a range of items. You can use this macro or send the LVM_REDRAWITEMS message explicitly. // ListView_RemoveAllGroups - Removes all groups from a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_REMOVEALLGROUPS message explicitly. // ListView_RemoveGroup - Removes a group from a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_REMOVEGROUP message explicitly. // ListView_Scroll - Scrolls the content of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SCROLL message explicitly. // ListView_SetBkColor - Sets the background color of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETBKCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_SetBkImage - Sets the background image in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETBKIMAGE message explicitly. // ListView_SetCallbackMask - Changes the callback mask for a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETCALLBACKMASK message explicitly. // ListView_SetCheckState - Selects or deselects an item in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMSTATE message explicitly. // ListView_SetColumn - Sets the attributes of a list-view column. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETCOLUMN message explicitly. // ListView_SetColumnOrderArray - Sets the left-to-right order of columns in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETCOLUMNORDERARRAY message explicitly. // ListView_SetColumnWidth - Used to change the width of a column in report view or the width of all columns in list-view mode. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message explicitly. // ListView_SetExtendedListViewStyle - Sets extended styles for list-view controls. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE message explicitly. // ListView_SetExtendedListViewStyleEx - Sets extended styles for list-view controls using the style mask. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETEXTENDEDLISTVIEWSTYLE message explicitly. // ListView_SetGroupHeaderImageList - Assigns an image list to the group header of a list-view control. // ListView_SetGroupInfo - Sets group information. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETGROUPINFO message explicitly. // ListView_SetGroupMetrics - Sets information about the display of groups. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETGROUPMETRICS message explicitly. // ListView_SetGroupState - Sets the state for a specified group. // ListView_SetHotCursor - Sets the HCURSOR that the list-view control uses when the pointer is over an item while hot tracking is enabled. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETHOTCURSOR message explicitly. To check whether hot tracking is enabled, call SystemParametersInfo. // ListView_SetHotItem - Sets the hot item in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETHOTITEM message explicitly. // ListView_SetHoverTime - Sets the amount of time that the mouse cursor must hover over an item before it is selected. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETHOVERTIME message explicitly. // ListView_SetIconSpacing - Sets the spacing between icons in list-view controls set to the LVS_ICON style. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETICONSPACING message explicitly. // ListView_SetImageList - Assigns an image list to a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // ListView_SetInfoTip - Sets tooltip text. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETINFOTIP message explicitly. // ListView_SetInsertMark - Sets the insertion point to the defined position. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETINSERTMARK message explicitly. // ListView_SetInsertMarkColor - Sets the color of the insertion point. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETINSERTMARKCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_SetItem - Sets some or all of a list-view item's attributes. You can also use ListView_SetItem to set the text of a subitem. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEM message explicitly. // ListView_SetItemCount - Causes the list-view control to allocate memory for the specified number of items. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMCOUNT message explicitly. // ListView_SetItemCountEx - Sets the virtual number of items in a virtual list view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMCOUNT message explicitly. // ListView_SetItemIndexState - Sets the state of a specified list-view item. Use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMINDEXSTATE message explicitly. // ListView_SetItemPosition - Moves an item to a specified position in a list-view control (in icon or small icon view). You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMPOSITION message explicitly. // ListView_SetItemPosition32 - Moves an item to a specified position in a list-view control (in icon or small icon view). // ListView_SetItemState - Changes the state of an item in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMSTATE message explicitly. // ListView_SetItemText - Changes the text of a list-view item or subitem. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETITEMTEXT message explicitly. // ListView_SetOutlineColor - Sets the color of the border of a list-view control if the LVS_EX_BORDERSELECT extended window style is set. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETOUTLINECOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_SetSelectedColumn - Sets the index of the selected column. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETSELECTEDCOLUMN message explicitly. // ListView_SetSelectionMark - Sets the selection mark in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETSELECTIONMARK message explicitly. // ListView_SetTextBkColor - Sets the background color of text in a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETTEXTBKCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_SetTextColor - Sets the text color of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETTEXTCOLOR message explicitly. // ListView_SetTileInfo - Sets information for an existing tile of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETTILEINFO message explicitly. // ListView_SetTileViewInfo - Sets information that a list-view control uses in tile view. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETTILEVIEWINFO message explicitly. // ListView_SetToolTips - Sets the tooltip control that the list-view control will use to display tooltips. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETTOOLTIPS message explicitly. // ListView_SetUnicodeFormat - Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. (ListView_SetUnicodeFormat) // ListView_SetView - Sets the view of a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETVIEW message explicitly. // ListView_SetWorkAreas - Sets the working areas within a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SETWORKAREAS message explicitly. // ListView_SortGroups - Uses an application-defined comparison function to sort groups by ID within a list-view control. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SORTGROUPS message explicitly. // ListView_SortItems - Uses an application-defined comparison function to sort the items of a list-view control. The index of each item changes to reflect the new sequence. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SORTITEMS message explicitly. // ListView_SortItemsEx - Uses an application-defined comparison function to sort the items of a list-view control. The index of each item changes to reflect the new sequence. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SORTITEMSEX message explicitly. // ListView_SubItemHitTest - Determines which list-view item or subitem is located at a given position. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SUBITEMHITTEST message explicitly. (ListView_SubItemHitTest) // ListView_SubItemHitTestEx - Determines which list-view item or subitem is located at a given position. You can use this macro or send the LVM_SUBITEMHITTEST message explicitly. (ListView_SubItemHitTestEx) // ListView_Update - Updates a list-view item. If the list-view control has the LVS_AUTOARRANGE style, this macro causes the list-view control to be arranged. You can use this macro or send the LVM_UPDATE message explicitly. // LoadIconMetric - Loads a specified icon resource with a client-specified system metric. // LoadIconWithScaleDown - Loads an icon. If the icon is not a standard size, this function scales down a larger image instead of scaling up a smaller image. // LPFNADDPROPSHEETPAGE - Specifies an application-defined callback function that a property sheet extension uses to add a page to a property sheet. // LPFNPSPCALLBACKA - Specifies an application-defined callback function that a property sheet calls when a page is created and when it is about to be destroyed. An application can use this function to perform initialization and cleanup operations for the page. (ANSI) // LPFNPSPCALLBACKW - Specifies an application-defined callback function that a property sheet calls when a page is created and when it is about to be destroyed. An application can use this function to perform initialization and cleanup operations for the page. (Unicode) // MakeDragList - Changes the specified single-selection list box to a drag list box. // MAKEIPADDRESS - Packs four byte-values into a single LPARAM suitable for use with the IPM_SETADDRESS message. // MAKEIPRANGE - Packs two byte-values into a single LPARAM suitable for use with the IPM_SETRANGE message. // MenuHelp - Processes WM_MENUSELECT and WM_COMMAND messages and displays Help text about the current menu in the specified status window. // Merge - Creates a new image by combining two existing images. This method also creates a new image list in which to store the image. // MonthCal_GetCalendarBorder - Gets the border size, in pixels, of a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETCALENDARBORDER message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetCalendarCount - Gets the number of calendars currently displayed in the calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETCALENDARCOUNT message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetCalendarGridInfo - Gets information about a calendar grid. // MonthCal_GetCALID - Gets the current calendar ID for the given calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETCALID message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetColor - Retrieves the color for a given portion of a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETCOLOR message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetCurrentView - Gets the view for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETCURRENTVIEW message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetCurSel - Retrieves the currently selected date. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetFirstDayOfWeek - Retrieves the first day of the week for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETFIRSTDAYOFWEEK message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetMaxSelCount - Retrieves the maximum date range that can be selected in a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETMAXSELCOUNT message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetMaxTodayWidth - Retrieves the maximum width of the "today" string in a month calendar control. This includes the label text and the date text. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETMAXTODAYWIDTH message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetMinReqRect - Retrieves the minimum size required to display a full month in a month calendar control. Size information is presented in the form of a RECT structure. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETMINREQRECT message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetMonthDelta - Retrieves the scroll rate for a month calendar control. The scroll rate is the number of months that the control moves its display when the user clicks a scroll button. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETMONTHDELTA message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetMonthRange - Retrieves date information (using SYSTEMTIME structures) that represents the high and low limits of a month calendar control's display. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETMONTHRANGE message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetRange - Retrieves the minimum and maximum allowable dates set for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETRANGE message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetSelRange - Retrieves date information that represents the upper and lower limits of the date range currently selected by the user. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETSELRANGE message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetToday - Retrieves the date information for the date specified as "today" for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETTODAY message explicitly. // MonthCal_GetUnicodeFormat - Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT message explicitly. // MonthCal_HitTest - Determines which portion of a month calendar control is at a given point on the screen. You can use this macro or send the MCM_HITTEST message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetCalendarBorder - Sets the border size, in pixels, of a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETCALENDARBORDER message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetCALID - Sets the calendar ID for the given calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETCALID message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetColor - Sets the color for a given portion of a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETCOLOR message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetCurrentView - Sets the view for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETCURRENTVIEW message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetCurSel - Sets the currently selected date for a month calendar control. If the specified date is not in view, the control updates the display to bring it into view. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetDayState - Sets the day states for all months that are currently visible within a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETDAYSTATE message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetFirstDayOfWeek - Sets the first day of the week for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETFIRSTDAYOFWEEK message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetMaxSelCount - Sets the maximum number of days that can be selected in a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETMAXSELCOUNT message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetMonthDelta - Sets the scroll rate for a month calendar control. The scroll rate is the number of months that the control moves its display when the user clicks a scroll button. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETMONTHDELTA message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetRange - Sets the minimum and maximum allowable dates for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETRANGE message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetSelRange - Sets the selection for a month calendar control to a given date range. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETSELRANGE message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetToday - Sets the "today" selection for a month calendar control. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SETTODAY message explicitly. // MonthCal_SetUnicodeFormat - Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. (MonthCal_SetUnicodeFormat) // MonthCal_SizeRectToMin - Calculates how many calendars will fit in the given rectangle, and then returns the minimum size that a rectangle needs to be to fit that number of calendars. You can use this macro or send the MCM_SIZERECTTOMIN message explicitly. // Move - Moves the insertion point forward or backward a specified number of units. If the range is nondegenerate, the range is collapsed to an insertion point at either end, depending on Count, and then is moved. // MoveBoundary - Moves the start boundary of a string, by index, for a selected number of characters. // MoveDown - Mimics the functionality of the Down Arrow and Page Down keys. // MoveEnd - Moves the end position of the range. // MoveEndUntil - Moves the range's end to the character position of the first character found that is in the set of characters specified by Cset, provided that the character is found within Count characters of the range's end. // MoveEndWhile - Moves the end of the range either Count characters or just past all contiguous characters that are found in the set of characters specified by Cset, whichever is less. // MoveLeft - Generalizes the functionality of the Left Arrow key. // MoveRight - Generalizes the functionality of the Right Arrow key. // MoveStart - Moves the start position of the range the specified number of units in the specified direction. // MoveStartUntil - Moves the start position of the range the position of the first character found that is in the set of characters specified by Cset, provided that the character is found within Count characters of the start position. // MoveStartWhile - Moves the start position of the range either Count characters, or just past all contiguous characters that are found in the set of characters specified by Cset, whichever is less. // MoveUntil - Searches up to Count characters for the first character in the set of characters specified by Cset. If a character is found, the range is collapsed to that point. The start of the search and the direction are also specified by Count. // MoveUp - Mimics the functionality of the Up Arrow and Page Up keys. // MoveWhile - Starts at a specified end of a range and searches while the characters belong to the set specified by Cset and while the number of characters is less than or equal to Count. // New - Opens a new document. // Notify - Notifies the Text Object Model (TOM) engine client of particular Input Method Editor (IME) events. // OnTxCharFormatChange - Sets the default character format for the text host. // OnTxInPlaceActivate - Notifies the text services object that this control is in-place active. // OnTxInPlaceDeactivate - Notifies the text services object that this control is no longer in-place active. // OnTxParaFormatChange - Sets the default paragraph format for the text host. // OnTxPropertyBitsChange - Sets properties (represented by bits) for the control. // OnTxSetCursor - Notifies the text services object to set the cursor. // OnTxUIActivate - Informs the text services object that the control is now UI active. // OnTxUIDeactivate - Informs the text services object that the control is no longer UI active. // Open - Opens a specified document. There are parameters to specify access and sharing privileges, creation and conversion of the file, as well as the code page for the file. // OpenThemeData - Opens the theme data for a window and its associated class. // OpenThemeDataEx - Opens the theme data associated with a window for specified theme classes. // PackTouchHitTestingProximityEvaluation - Returns the proximity evaluation score and the adjusted touch-point coordinates as a packed value for the WM_TOUCHHITTESTING callback. // Pager_ForwardMouse - Enables or disables mouse forwarding for the pager control. When mouse forwarding is enabled, the pager control forwards WM_MOUSEMOVE messages to the contained window. You can use this macro or send the PGM_FORWARDMOUSE message explicitly. // Pager_GetBkColor - Retrieves the current background color for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_GETBKCOLOR message explicitly. // Pager_GetBorder - Retrieves the current border size for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_GETBORDER message explicitly. // Pager_GetButtonSize - Retrieves the current button size for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_GETBUTTONSIZE message explicitly. // Pager_GetButtonState - Retrieves the state of the specified button in a pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_GETBUTTONSTATE message explicitly. // Pager_GetDropTarget - Retrieves a pager control's IDropTarget interface pointer. You can use this macro or send the PGM_GETDROPTARGET message explicitly. // Pager_GetPos - Retrieves the current scroll position of the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_GETPOS message explicitly. // Pager_RecalcSize - Forces the pager control to recalculate the size of the contained window. Using this macro will result in a PGN_CALCSIZE notification being sent. You can use this macro or send the PGM_RECALCSIZE message explicitly. // Pager_SetBkColor - Sets the current background color for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_SETBKCOLOR message explicitly. // Pager_SetBorder - Sets the current border size for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_SETBORDER message explicitly. // Pager_SetButtonSize - Sets the current button size for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_SETBUTTONSIZE message explicitly. // Pager_SetChild - Sets the contained window for the pager control. // Pager_SetPos - Sets the scroll position for the pager control. You can use this macro or send the PGM_SETPOS message explicitly. // Pager_SetScrollInfo - Sets the scrolling parameters of the pager control, including the timeout value, the lines per timeout, and the pixels per line. You can use this macro or send the PGM_SETSETSCROLLINFO message explicitly. // Paste - Pastes text from a specified data object. // PFNDACOMPARE - Defines the prototype for the compare function used by DSA_Sort. // PFNDACOMPARECONST - Defines the prototype for the compare function used by DSA_Sort when the items being compared are constant objects. // PFNDAENUMCALLBACK - Defines the prototype for the callback function used by dynamic structure array (DSA) and dynamic pointer array (DPA) functions. // PFNDAENUMCALLBACKCONST - Defines the prototype for the callback function used by dynamic structure array (DSA) and dynamic pointer array (DPA) functions when the items involved are pointers to constant data. // PFNDPAMERGE - Defines the prototype for the merge function used by DPA_Merge. // PFNDPAMERGECONST - Defines the prototype for the merge function used by DPA_Merge, using constant values. // PFNDPASTREAM - Defines the prototype for the callback function used by DPA_LoadStream and DPA_SaveStream. // PFNLVGROUPCOMPARE - The LVGroupCompare function is an application-defined callback function used with the LVM_INSERTGROUPSORTED and LVM_SORTGROUPS messages. // PFNPROPSHEETCALLBACK - An application-defined callback function that the system calls when the property sheet is being created and initialized. // PFTASKDIALOGCALLBACK - The TaskDialogCallbackProc function is an application-defined function used with the TaskDialogIndirect function. // PrefixTop - Prefixes a string to the top string in the collection. // PreloadImages - Preloads images, as specified. // PropertySheetA - Creates a property sheet and adds the pages defined in the specified property sheet header structure. (ANSI) // PropertySheetW - Creates a property sheet and adds the pages defined in the specified property sheet header structure. (Unicode) // PropSheet_AddPage - Adds a new page to the end of an existing property sheet. You can use this macro or send the PSM_ADDPAGE message explicitly. // PropSheet_Apply - Simulates the selection of the Apply button, indicating that one or more pages have changed and the changes need to be validated and recorded. You can use this macro or send the PSM_APPLY message explicitly. // PropSheet_CancelToClose - Used when changes made since the most recent PSN_APPLY notification cannot be canceled. You can also send a PSM_CANCELTOCLOSE message explicitly. // PropSheet_Changed - Informs a property sheet that information in a page has changed. You can use this macro or send the PSM_CHANGED message explicitly. // PropSheet_EnableWizButtons - Enables or disables buttons in an Aero wizard. You can use this macro or send the PSM_ENABLEWIZBUTTONS message explicitly. // PropSheet_GetCurrentPageHwnd - Retrieves a handle to the window of the current page of a property sheet. You can use this macro or send the PSM_GETCURRENTPAGEHWND message explicitly. // PropSheet_GetResult - Used by modeless property sheets to retrieve the information returned to modal property sheets by PropertySheet. You can use this macro or sent the PSM_GETRESULT message explicitly. // PropSheet_GetTabControl - Retrieves the handle to the tab control of a property sheet. You can use this macro or send the PSM_GETTABCONTROL message explicitly. // PropSheet_HwndToIndex - Takes a window handle of the property sheet page and returns its zero-based index. You can use this macro or send the PSM_HWNDTOINDEX message explicitly. // PropSheet_IdToIndex - Takes the resource identifier (ID) of a property sheet page and returns its zero-based index. You can use this macro or send the PSM_IDTOINDEX message explicitly. // PropSheet_IndexToHwnd - Takes the index of a property sheet page and returns its window handle. You can use this macro or send the PSM_INDEXTOHWND message explicitly. // PropSheet_IndexToId - Takes the index of a property sheet page and returns its resource identifier (ID). You can use this macro or send the PSM_INDEXTOID message explicitly. // PropSheet_IndexToPage - Takes the index of a property sheet page and returns its HPROPSHEETPAGE handle. You can use this macro or send the PSM_INDEXTOPAGE message explicitly. // PropSheet_InsertPage - Inserts a new page into an existing property sheet. The page can be inserted either at a specified index or after a specified page. You can use this macro or send the PSM_INSERTPAGE message explicitly. // PropSheet_IsDialogMessage - Passes a message to a property sheet dialog box and indicates whether the dialog box processed the message. You can use this macro or send the PSM_ISDIALOGMESSAGE message explicitly. // PropSheet_PageToIndex - Takes the HPROPSHEETPAGE handle of a property sheet page and returns its zero-based index. You can use this macro or send the PSM_PAGETOINDEX message explicitly. // PropSheet_PressButton - Simulates the selection of a property sheet button. You can use this macro or send the PSM_PRESSBUTTON message explicitly. // PropSheet_QuerySiblings - Causes a property sheet to send the PSM_QUERYSIBLINGS message to each of its pages. You can use this macro or send the PSM_QUERYSIBLINGS message explicitly. // PropSheet_RebootSystem - Indicates the system needs to be restarted for the changes to take effect. You can use this macro or send the PSM_REBOOTSYSTEM message explicitly. // PropSheet_RecalcPageSizes - Recalculates the page size of a standard or wizard property sheet after pages have been added or removed. You can use this macro or send the PSM_RECALCPAGESIZES message explicitly. // PropSheet_RemovePage - Removes a page from a property sheet. You can use this macro or send the PSM_REMOVEPAGE message explicitly. // PropSheet_RestartWindows - Sends a PSM_RESTARTWINDOWS message indicating that Windows needs to be restarted for changes to take effect. You can use this macro or send the PSM_RESTARTWINDOWS message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetButtonText - Sets the text of a button in an Aero wizard. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETBUTTONTEXT message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetCurSel - Activates the specified page in a property sheet. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetCurSelByID - Activates the specified page in a property sheet based on the resource identifier of the page. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETCURSELID message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetFinishText - Sets the text of the Finish button in a wizard, shows and enables the button, and hides the Next and Back buttons. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETFINISHTEXT message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetHeaderSubTitle - Sets the subtitle text for the header of a wizard's interior page. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETHEADERSUBTITLE message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetHeaderTitle - Sets the title text for the header of a wizard's interior page. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETHEADERTITLE message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetNextText - Sets the text of the Next button in a wizard. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETNEXTTEXT message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetTitle - Sets the title of a property sheet. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETTITLE message explicitly. // PropSheet_SetWizButtons - Enables or disables the Back, Next, and Finish buttons in a wizard by posting a PSM_SETWIZBUTTONS message. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SETWIZBUTTONS message explicitly. // PropSheet_ShowWizButtons - Show or hide buttons in a wizard. You can use this macro or send the PSM_SHOWWIZBUTTONS message explicitly. // PropSheet_UnChanged - Informs a property sheet that information in a page has reverted to the previously saved state. You can use this macro or send the PSM_UNCHANGED message explicitly. // QueryAcceptData - During a paste operation or a drag event, determines if the data that is pasted or dragged should be accepted. // QueryInsertObject - Queries the application as to whether an object should be inserted. The member is called when pasting and when reading Rich Text Format (RTF). // Range - Retrieves a text range object for a specified range of content in the active story of the document. // Range2 - Retrieves a new text range for the active story of the document. // RangeFromPoint - Retrieves a range for the content at or nearest to the specified point on the screen. // RangeFromPoint2 - Retrieves the degenerate range at (or nearest to) a particular point on the screen. // Redo - Performs a specified number of redo operations. // RegisterPointerDeviceNotifications - Registers a window to process the WM_POINTERDEVICECHANGE, WM_POINTERDEVICEINRANGE, and WM_POINTERDEVICEOUTOFRANGE pointer device notifications. // RegisterTouchHitTestingWindow - Registers a window to process the WM_TOUCHHITTESTING notification. // ReleaseCallManager - Releases the call manager. // ReleaseImmContext - Releases an Input Method Manager (IMM) input context. // Remove - Removes an image from an image list. (IImageList.// Remove) // Remove - Removes a string from a string collection, starting at an index. // Replace - Replaces an image in an image list with a new image. (IImageList.Replace) // Replace2 - Replaces an image in an image list. // ReplaceFromImageList - Replaces an image in one image list with an image from another image list. // ReplaceIcon - Replaces an image with an icon or cursor. (IImageList.ReplaceIcon) // Reset - Resets the character formatting to the specified values. // Reset - Resets the paragraph formatting to a choice of default values. // Reset - Resets a row. // Resize - Resizes the current image. // Save - Saves the document. // SaveCompleted - Indicates when the most recent save operation has been completed and that the rich edit control should hold onto a different storage for the object. // ScrollBar_Enable - Enables or disables a scroll bar control. // ScrollBar_GetPos - Retrieves the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar. // ScrollBar_GetRange - Gets the range of a scroll bar. // ScrollBar_SetPos - Sets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar and, if requested, redraws the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. (ScrollBar_SetPos) // ScrollBar_SetRange - Sets the range of a scroll bar. // ScrollBar_Show - Shows or hides a scroll bar control. // ScrollDC - The ScrollDC function scrolls a rectangle of bits horizontally and vertically. // ScrollIntoView - Scrolls the specified range into view. // ScrollWindow - The ScrollWindow function scrolls the contents of the specified window's client area. // ScrollWindowEx - The ScrollWindowEx function scrolls the contents of the specified window's client area. // SECOND_IPADDRESS - Extracts the field 1 value from a packed IP address retrieved with the IPM_GETADDRESS message. // Select - Sets the start and end positions, and story values of the active selection, to those of this range. // SetActive - Sets the active state of a story. (ITextStory.SetActive) // SetActiveStory - Sets the active story; that is, the story that receives keyboard and mouse input. // SetActiveSubrange - Makes the specified subrange the active subrange of this range. // SetAlignment - Sets the paragraph alignment. // SetAlignment - Sets the horizontal alignment of a row. // SetAllCaps - Sets whether the characters are all uppercase. // SetAnimation - Sets the animation type. // SetAutoLigatures - Sets whether support for automatic ligatures is active. // SetAutospaceAlpha - Sets the East Asian "autospace alpha" state. // SetAutospaceNumeric - Sets the East Asian "autospace numeric" state. // SetAutospaceParens - Sets the East Asian "autospace parentheses" state. // SetBackColor - Sets the background color. // SetBkColor - Sets the background color for an image list. // SetBold - Sets whether characters are bold. // SetCallback - Sets an image list callback. // SetCaretType - Sets the caret type. // SetCellAlignment - Sets the vertical alignment of the active cell. // SetCellBorderColors - Sets the border colors of the active cell. // SetCellBorderWidths - Sets the border widths of the active cell. // SetCellColorBack - Sets the background color of the active cell. // SetCellColorFore - Sets the foreground color of the active cell. // SetCellCount - Sets the count of cells in a row. // SetCellCountCache - Sets the count of cells cached for a row. // SetCellIndex - Sets the index of the active cell. // SetCellMargin - Sets the cell margin of a row. // SetCellMergeFlags - Sets the merge flags of the active cell. // SetCellShading - Sets the shading of the active cell. // SetCellVerticalText - Sets the vertical-text setting of the active cell. // SetCellWidth - Sets the active cell width in twips. // SetChar - Sets the character at the starting position of the range. // SetCharRep - Sets the character repertoire (writing system). // SetCompressionMode - Sets the East Asian compression mode. // SetCookie - Sets the client cookie. // SetDefaultTabStop - Sets the default tab stop, which is used when no tab exists beyond the current display position. // SetDocumentFont - Sets the default character formatting for this instance of the Text Object Model (TOM) engine. // SetDocumentPara - Sets the default paragraph formatting for this instance of the Text Object Model (TOM) engine. // SetDoubleStrike - Sets whether characters are displayed with double horizontal lines through the center. // SetDragCursorImage - Creates a new drag image by combining the specified image, which is typically a mouse cursor image, with the current drag image. // SetDropCap - Sets the drop-cap parameters for the paragraph that contains the current range. // SetDuplicate - Sets the character formatting by copying another text font object. // SetDuplicate - Sets the formatting for an existing paragraph by copying a given format. // SetDuplicate2 - Sets the properties of this object by copying the properties of another text font object. // SetDuplicate2 - Sets the properties of this object by copying the properties of another text paragraph object. // SetDvaspect - Sets the aspect that a rich edit control uses to draw an object. This call does not change the drawing information cached in the object; this must be done by the caller. The call does cause the object to be redrawn. // SetEffectColor - Specifies the color to use for special text attributes. // SetEffects - Sets the character format effects. // SetEffects - Sets the paragraph format effects. // SetEffects2 - Sets the additional character format effects. // SetEmboss - Sets whether characters are embossed. // SetEnd - Sets the end position of the range. // SetEngrave - Sets whether characters are displayed as imprinted characters. // SetFlags - Sets the text selection flags. // SetFont - Sets this range's character attributes to those of the specified ITextFont object. // SetFont2 - Sets the character formatting attributes of the range. // SetFontAlignment - Sets the paragraph font alignment for Chinese, Japanese, Korean text. // SetForeColor - Sets the foreground (text) color. // SetFormattedText - Sets the formatted text of this range text to the formatted text of the specified range. // SetFormattedText - Replaces a story’s text with specified formatted text. // SetFormattedText - Replaces text with formatted text. // SetFormattedText2 - Sets the text of this range to the formatted text of the specified range. // SetGravity - Sets the gravity of this range. // SetHangingPunctuation - Sets whether to hang punctuation symbols on the right margin when the paragraph is justified. // SetHeight - Sets the height of a row. // SetHidden - Sets whether characters are hidden. // SetHostNames - Sets the host names to be given to objects as they are inserted to a rich edit control. The host names are used in the user interface of servers to describe the container context of opened objects. // SetHyphenation - Controls hyphenation for the paragraphs in the range. // SetIconSize - Sets the dimensions of images in an image list and removes all images from the list. (IImageList.SetIconSize) // SetImageCount - Resizes an existing image list. (IImageList.SetImageCount) // SetIMEInProgress - Sets the state of the Input Method Editor (IME) in-progress flag. // SetIndent - Sets the indent of a row. // SetIndents - Sets the first-line indent, the left indent, and the right indent for a paragraph. // SetIndex - Changes this range to the specified unit of the story. // SetInlineObject - Sets or inserts the properties of an inline object for a degenerate range. // SetItalic - Sets whether characters are in italics. // SetKeepTogether - Controls whether page breaks are allowed within a paragraph in a range. // SetKeepTogether - Sets whether this row is allowed to be broken across pages. // SetKeepWithNext - Controls whether page breaks are allowed between the paragraphs in a range. // SetKeepWithNext - Sets whether a row should appear on the same page as the row that follows it. // SetKerning - Sets the minimum font size at which kerning occurs. // SetLanguageID - Sets the language ID or language code identifier (LCID). // SetLineSpacing - Sets the paragraph line-spacing rule and the line spacing for a paragraph. // SetLinkAvailable - Sets the value of the link-available bit in the object's flags. // SetListAlignment - Sets the alignment of bulleted or numbered text used for paragraphs. // SetListLevelIndex - Sets the list level index used for paragraphs. // SetListStart - Sets the starting number or Unicode value for a numbered list. // SetListTab - Sets the list tab setting, which is the distance between the first indent and the start of the text on the first line. // SetListType - Sets the type of list to be used for paragraphs. // SetMathProperties - Specifies the math properties to use for the document. // SetMathZone - Sets whether a math zone is active. // SetModWidthPairs - Sets whether "decrease widths on pairs" is active. // SetModWidthSpace - Sets whether "increase width of whitespace" is active. // SetName - Sets the font name. // SetNoLineNumber - Determines whether to suppress line numbering of paragraphs in a range. // SetNotificationMode - Sets the notification mode. // SetOldNumbers - Sets whether old-style numbers are active. // SetOpCp - Sets the character position in the source range's story that has desired character formatting attributes. // SetOriginalSize - Sets the original size of a specified image. // SetOutline - Sets whether characters are displayed as outlined characters. // SetOverlapping - Sets whether overlapping text is active. // SetOverlayImage - Adds a specified image to the list of images used as overlay masks. // SetPageBreakBefore - Controls whether there is a page break before each paragraph in a range. // SetPara - Sets the paragraph attributes of this range to those of the specified ITextPara object. // SetPara2 - Sets the paragraph format attributes of a range. // SetPoint - Changes the range based on a specified point at or up through (depending on Extend) the point (x, y) aligned according to Type. // SetPosition - Sets the amount that characters are offset vertically relative to the baseline. // SetPositionSubSuper - Sets the position of a subscript or superscript relative to the baseline, as a percentage of the font height. // SetProperty - Specifies a new value for a property. // SetProperty - Sets the value of the specified property. (ITextFont2.SetProperty) // SetProperty - Sets the property value. // SetProperty - Sets the value of the specified property. (ITextRange2.SetProperty) // SetProperty - Sets the value of the specified property. (ITextRow.SetProperty) // SetProperty - Sets the value of the specified property. (ITextStory.SetProperty) // SetProtected - Sets whether characters are protected against attempts to modify them. // SetRange - Adjusts the range endpoints to the specified values. // SetRightIndent - Sets the right margin of paragraph. // SetRTL - Sets whether this row has right-to-left orientation. // SetSaved - Sets the document Saved property. // SetScaling - Sets the font horizontal scaling percentage. // SetScrollInfo - The SetScrollInfo function sets the parameters of a scroll bar, including the minimum and maximum scrolling positions, the page size, and the position of the scroll box (thumb). The function also redraws the scroll bar, if requested. // SetScrollPos - The SetScrollPos function sets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar and, if requested, redraws the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. // SetScrollRange - The SetScrollRange function sets the minimum and maximum scroll box positions for the specified scroll bar. // SetShadow - Sets whether characters are displayed as shadowed characters. // SetSize - Sets the font size. // SetSmallCaps - Sets whether characters are in small capital letters. // SetSnapToGrid - Sets whether paragraph lines snap to a vertical grid that could be defined for the whole document. // SetSpaceAfter - Sets the amount of space that follows a paragraph. // SetSpaceBefore - Sets the amount of space preceding a paragraph. // SetSpaceExtension - Sets the East Asian space extension value. // SetSpacing - Sets the amount of horizontal spacing between characters. // SetStart - Sets the character position for the start of this range. // SetStrikeThrough - Sets whether characters are displayed with a horizontal line through the center. // SetStyle - Sets the character style handle of the characters in a range. // SetStyle - Sets the paragraph style for the paragraphs in a range. // SetSubscript - Sets whether characters are displayed as subscript. // SetSuperscript - Sets whether characters are displayed as superscript. // SetText - Sets the text in this range. // SetText - Replaces the text in a story with the specified text. // SetText2 - Sets the text of this range. // SetThemeAppProperties - Sets the flags that determine how visual styles are implemented in the calling application. // SetTrimPunctuationAtStart - Sets whether to trim the leading space of a punctuation symbol at the start of a line. // SetType - Sets the story type. // SetTypographyOptions - Specifies the typography options for the document. // SetUnderline - Sets the type of underlining for the characters in a range. // SetUnderlinePositionMode - Sets the underline position mode. // SetURL - Sets the text in this range to that of the specified URL. // SetWeight - Sets the font weight for the characters in a range. // SetWidowControl - Controls the suppression of widows and orphans. // SetWindowFeedbackSetting - Sets the feedback configuration for a window. // SetWindowTheme - Causes a window to use a different set of visual style information than its class normally uses. // SetWindowThemeAttribute - Sets attributes to control how visual styles are applied to a specified window. // SetWindowThemeNonClientAttributes - Sets non-client attributes to control how visual styles are applied to a specified window. // ShowContainerUI - Indicates whether or not the application is to display its container UI. // ShowHideMenuCtl - Sets or removes the specified menu item's check mark attribute and shows or hides the corresponding control. // ShowScrollBar - The ShowScrollBar function shows or hides the specified scroll bar. // ShutdownTextServices - Disconnects a host from a text services instance. // StartOf - Moves the range ends to the start of the first overlapping Unit in the range. // Static_Enable - Enables or disables a static control. // Static_GetIcon - Retrieves a handle to the icon associated with a static control that has the SS_ICON style. You can use this macro or send the STM_GETICON message explicitly. // Static_GetText - Gets the text of a static control. // Static_GetTextLength - Gets the number of characters in the text of a static control. // Static_SetIcon - Sets the icon for a static control. You can use this macro or send the STM_SETICON message explicitly. // Static_SetText - Sets the text of a static control. // Str_SetPtrW - Sets ppszCurrent to a copy of pszNew and frees the previous value, if necessary. // SuffixTop - Suffixes a string to the top string in the collection. // Swap - Swaps the top two strings in the collection. // SysBeep - Generates a system beep. // TabCtrl_AdjustRect - Calculates a tab control's display area given a window rectangle, or calculates the window rectangle that would correspond to a specified display area. You can use this macro or send the TCM_ADJUSTRECT message explicitly. // TabCtrl_DeleteAllItems - Removes all items from a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_DELETEALLITEMS message explicitly. // TabCtrl_DeleteItem - Removes an item from a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_DELETEITEM message explicitly. // TabCtrl_DeselectAll - Resets items in a tab control, clearing any that were set to the TCIS_BUTTONPRESSED state. You can use this macro or send the TCM_DESELECTALL message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetCurFocus - Returns the index of the item that has the focus in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETCURFOCUS message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetCurSel - Determines the currently selected tab in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetExtendedStyle - Retrieves the extended styles that are currently in use for the tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETEXTENDEDSTYLE message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetImageList - Retrieves the image list associated with a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetItem - Retrieves information about a tab in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETITEM message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetItemCount - Retrieves the number of tabs in the tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETITEMCOUNT message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetItemRect - Retrieves the bounding rectangle for a tab in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetRowCount - Retrieves the current number of rows of tabs in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETROWCOUNT message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetToolTips - Retrieves the handle to the tooltip control associated with a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETTOOLTIPS message explicitly. // TabCtrl_GetUnicodeFormat - Retrieves the UNICODE character format flag for the control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_GETUNICODEFORMAT message explicitly. // TabCtrl_HighlightItem - Sets the highlight state of a tab item. You can use this macro or send the TCM_HIGHLIGHTITEM message explicitly. // TabCtrl_HitTest - Determines which tab, if any, is at a specified screen position. You can use this macro or send the TCM_HITTEST message explicitly. // TabCtrl_InsertItem - Inserts a new tab in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_INSERTITEM message explicitly. // TabCtrl_RemoveImage - Removes an image from a tab control's image list. You can use this macro or send the TCM_REMOVEIMAGE message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetCurFocus - Sets the focus to a specified tab in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETCURFOCUS message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetCurSel - Selects a tab in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetExtendedStyle - Sets the extended styles that the tab control will use. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETEXTENDEDSTYLE message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetImageList - Assigns an image list to a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetItem - Sets some or all of a tab's attributes. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETITEM message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetItemExtra - Sets the number of bytes per tab reserved for application-defined data in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETITEMEXTRA message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetItemSize - Sets the width and height of tabs in a fixed-width or owner-drawn tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETITEMSIZE message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetMinTabWidth - Sets the minimum width of items in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETMINTABWIDTH message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetPadding - Sets the amount of space (padding) around each tab's icon and label in a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETPADDING message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetToolTips - Assigns a tooltip control to a tab control. You can use this macro or send the TCM_SETTOOLTIPS message explicitly. // TabCtrl_SetUnicodeFormat - Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. (TabCtrl_SetUnicodeFormat) // TaskDialog - The TaskDialog function creates, displays, and operates a task dialog. // TaskDialogIndirect - The TaskDialogIndirect function creates, displays, and operates a task dialog. // THIRD_IPADDRESS - Extracts the field 2 value from a packed IP address retrieved with the IPM_GETADDRESS message. // TreeView_CreateDragImage - Creates a dragging bitmap for the specified item in a tree-view control. // TreeView_DeleteAllItems - Deletes all items from a tree-view control. // TreeView_DeleteItem - Removes an item and all its children from a tree-view control. You can also send the TVM_DELETEITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_EditLabel - Begins in-place editing of the specified item's text, replacing the text of the item with a single-line edit control containing the text. // TreeView_EndEditLabelNow - Ends the editing of a tree-view item's label. You can use this macro or send the TVM_ENDEDITLABELNOW message explicitly. // TreeView_EnsureVisible - Ensures that a tree-view item is visible, expanding the parent item or scrolling the tree-view control, if necessary. You can use this macro or send the TVM_ENSUREVISIBLE message explicitly. // TreeView_Expand - The TreeView_Expand macro expands or collapses the list of child items associated with the specified parent item, if any. You can use this macro or send the TVM_EXPAND message explicitly. // TreeView_GetBkColor - Retrieves the current background color of the control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETBKCOLOR message explicitly. // TreeView_GetCheckState - Gets the check state of the specified item. You can also use the TVM_GETITEMSTATE message directly. // TreeView_GetChild - Retrieves the first child item of the specified tree-view item. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_CHILD flag. // TreeView_GetCount - Retrieves a count of the items in a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // TreeView_GetDropHilight - Retrieves the tree-view item that is the target of a drag-and-drop operation. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_DROPHILITE flag. // TreeView_GetEditControl - Retrieves the handle to the edit control being used to edit a tree-view item's text. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETEDITCONTROL message explicitly. // TreeView_GetExtendedStyle - Retrieves the extended style for a specified tree-view control. Use this macro or send the TVM_GETEXTENDEDSTYLE message explicitly. // TreeView_GetFirstVisible - Retrieves the first visible item in a tree-view control window. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_FIRSTVISIBLE flag. // TreeView_GetImageList - Retrieves the handle to the normal or state image list associated with a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // TreeView_GetIndent - Retrieves the amount, in pixels, that child items are indented relative to their parent items. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETINDENT message explicitly. // TreeView_GetInsertMarkColor - Retrieves the color used to draw the insertion mark for the tree view. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETINSERTMARKCOLOR message explicitly. // TreeView_GetISearchString - Retrieves the incremental search string for a tree-view control. The tree-view control uses the incremental search string to select an item based on characters typed by the user. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETISEARCHSTRING message explicitly. // TreeView_GetItem - Retrieves some or all of a tree-view item's attributes. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_GetItemHeight - Retrieves the current height of the tree-view items. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // TreeView_GetItemPartRect - Retrieves the largest possible bounding rectangle that constitutes the "hit zone" for a specified part of an item. Use this macro or send the TVM_GETITEMPARTRECT message explicitly. // TreeView_GetItemRect - Retrieves the bounding rectangle for a tree-view item and indicates whether the item is visible. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // TreeView_GetItemState - Retrieves some or all of a tree-view item's state attributes. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETITEMSTATE message explicitly. // TreeView_GetLastVisible - Retrieves the last expanded item in a tree-view control. This does not retrieve the last item visible in the tree-view window. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_LASTVISIBLE flag. // TreeView_GetLineColor - Gets the current line color. You can also use the TVM_GETLINECOLOR message directly. // TreeView_GetNextItem - Retrieves the tree-view item that bears the specified relationship to a specified item. You can use this macro, use one of the TreeView_Get macros described below, or send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_GetNextSelected - Retrieves the tree-view item that bears the TVGN_NEXTSELECTED relationship to a specified tree item. // TreeView_GetNextSibling - Retrieves the next sibling item of a specified item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_NEXT flag. // TreeView_GetNextVisible - Retrieves the next visible item that follows a specified item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_NEXTVISIBLE flag. // TreeView_GetParent - Retrieves the parent item of the specified tree-view item. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_PARENT flag. // TreeView_GetPrevSibling - Retrieves the previous sibling item of a specified item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_PREVIOUS flag. // TreeView_GetPrevVisible - Retrieves the first visible item that precedes a specified item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_PREVIOUSVISIBLE flag. // TreeView_GetRoot - Retrieves the topmost or very first item of the tree-view control. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_ROOT flag. // TreeView_GetScrollTime - Retrieves the maximum scroll time for the tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETSCROLLTIME message explicitly. // TreeView_GetSelectedCount - TreeView_GetSelectedCount macro // TreeView_GetSelection - Retrieves the currently selected item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro, or you can explicitly send the TVM_GETNEXTITEM message with the TVGN_CARET flag. // TreeView_GetTextColor - Retrieves the current text color of the control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETTEXTCOLOR message explicitly. // TreeView_GetToolTips - Retrieves the handle to the child tooltip control used by a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETTOOLTIPS message explicitly. // TreeView_GetUnicodeFormat - Retrieves the Unicode character format flag for the control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETUNICODEFORMAT message explicitly. // TreeView_GetVisibleCount - Obtains the number of items that can be fully visible in the client window of a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_GETVISIBLECOUNT message explicitly. // TreeView_HitTest - Determines the location of the specified point relative to the client area of a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_HITTEST message explicitly. // TreeView_InsertItem - Inserts a new item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_INSERTITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_MapAccIDToHTREEITEM - Maps an accessibility ID to an HTREEITEM. You can use this macro or send the TVM_MAPACCIDTOHTREEITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_MapHTREEITEMToAccID - Maps an HTREEITEM to an accessibility ID. You can use this macro or send the TVM_MAPHTREEITEMTOACCID message explicitly. // TreeView_Select - Selects the specified tree-view item, scrolls the item into view, or redraws the item in the style used to indicate the target of a drag-and-drop operation. // TreeView_SelectDropTarget - Redraws a specified tree-view control item in the style used to indicate the target of a drag-and-drop operation. You can use this macro or the TreeView_Select macro, or you can send the TVM_SELECTITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_SelectItem - Selects the specified tree-view item. You can use this macro or the TreeView_Select macro, or you can send the TVM_SELECTITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_SelectSetFirstVisible - Scrolls the tree-view control vertically to ensure that the specified item is visible. // TreeView_SetAutoScrollInfo - Sets information used to determine auto-scroll characteristics. Use this macro or send the TVM_SETAUTOSCROLLINFO message explicitly. // TreeView_SetBkColor - Sets the background color of the control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETBKCOLOR message explicitly. // TreeView_SetBorder - Sets the size of the border for the items in a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETBORDER message explicitly. // TreeView_SetCheckState - Sets the item's state image to "checked" or "unchecked." You can also use the TVM_SETITEM message directly. // TreeView_SetExtendedStyle - Sets the extended style for a specified TreeView control. Use this macro or send the TVM_SETEXTENDEDSTYLE message explicitly. // TreeView_SetHot - Sets the hot item for a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETHOT message explicitly. // TreeView_SetImageList - Sets the normal or state image list for a tree-view control and redraws the control using the new images. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETIMAGELIST message explicitly. // TreeView_SetIndent - Sets the width of indentation for a tree-view control and redraws the control to reflect the new width. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETINDENT message explicitly. // TreeView_SetInsertMark - Sets the insertion mark in a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETINSERTMARK message explicitly. // TreeView_SetInsertMarkColor - Sets the color used to draw the insertion mark for the tree view. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETINSERTMARKCOLOR message explicitly. // TreeView_SetItem - The TreeView_SetItem macro sets some or all of a tree-view item's attributes. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_SetItemHeight - Sets the height of the tree-view items. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // TreeView_SetItemState - Sets a tree-view item's state attributes. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETITEM message explicitly. // TreeView_SetLineColor - Sets the current line color. You can also use the TVM_SETLINECOLOR message directly. // TreeView_SetScrollTime - Sets the maximum scroll time for the tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETSCROLLTIME message explicitly. // TreeView_SetTextColor - Sets the text color of the control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETTEXTCOLOR message explicitly. // TreeView_SetToolTips - Sets a tree-view control's child tooltip control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SETTOOLTIPS message explicitly. // TreeView_SetUnicodeFormat - Sets the Unicode character format flag for the control. (TreeView_SetUnicodeFormat) // TreeView_ShowInfoTip - Shows the infotip for a specified item in a tree-view control. Use this macro or send the TVM_SHOWINFOTIP message explicitly. // TreeView_SortChildren - Sorts the child items of the specified parent item in a tree-view control. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SORTCHILDREN message explicitly. // TreeView_SortChildrenCB - Sorts tree-view items using an application-defined callback function that compares the items. You can use this macro or send the TVM_SORTCHILDRENCB message explicitly. // TxActivate - Notifies the text host that the control is active. // TxClientToScreen - Converts text host coordinates to screen coordinates. // TxCreateCaret - Creates a new shape for windowless rich edit control's caret. // TxDeactivate - Notifies the text host that the control is now inactive. // TxDestroyCaret - Destroys the caret (Direct2D only). // TxDraw - Draws the text services object. // TxDrawD2D - Draws the text services object by using Direct2D rendering. // TxEnableScrollBar - Enables or disables one or both scroll bar arrows in the text host window. // TxFreeTextServicesNotification - Notifies the text host that text services have been freed. // TxGetAcceleratorPos - Requests the special character to use for the underlining accelerator character. // TxGetBackStyle - Requests the background style of the text host. // TxGetBaseLinePos - Gets the base line position of the first visible line, in pixels, relative to the text services client rectangle. This permits aligning controls on their base lines. // TxGetCachedSize - Returns the cached drawing logical size (if any) that text services is using. Typically, this will be the size of the last client rectangle used in ITextServices::TxDraw, ITextServices::OnTxSetCursor, and so forth, although it is not guaranteed to be. // TxGetCharFormat - Requests the text host's default character format. // TxGetClientRect - Retrieves the client coordinates of the text host's client area. // TxGetCurTargetX - Gets the target x position, that is, the current horizontal position of the caret. // TxGetDC - Requests the device context for the text host window. // TxGetDropTarget - Gets the drop target for the text control. // TxGetEastAsianFlags - Gets whether Input Method Editor (IME) input is allowed and whether the edit styles include ES_SELFIME. // TxGetEditStyle - Gets whether a rich edit control is in a dialog box. // TxGetExtent - Requests the native size of the control in HIMETRIC. // TxGetHorzExtent - Gets the horizontal scroll extent of the text host window. // TxGetHScroll - Returns horizontal scroll bar information. // TxGetMaxLength - Gets the text host's maximum allowed length for the text. // TxGetNaturalSize - Allows a control to be resized so it fits its content appropriately. // TxGetNaturalSize2 - Resizes a control so it fits its content appropriately. This method is similar to TxGetNaturalSize, but also retrieves the ascent of the top line of text. // TxGetPalette - Retrieves the color palette of the rich edit control. // TxGetParaFormat - Requests the text host's default paragraph format. // TxGetPasswordChar - Requests the text host's password character. // TxGetPropertyBits - Requests the bit property settings for the text host. // TxGetScrollBars - Requests information about the scroll bars supported by the text host. // TxGetSelectionBarWidth - Returns the size of selection bar in HIMETRIC. // TxGetSysColor - Retrieves the text host's color for a specified display element. // TxGetText - Returns all of the Unicode plain text in the control as a BSTR. // TxGetViewInset - Requests the dimensions of the white space inset around the text in the text host window. // TxGetVScroll - Returns vertical scroll bar state information. // TxGetWindow - Retrieves the handle of the text host window for the rich edit control. // TxGetWindowStyles - Retrieves the window styles and extended windows styles of the text host window. // TxImmGetContext - Retrieves the Input Method Editor (IME) input context associated with the text services host. This method is used only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. // TxImmReleaseContext - Releases an input context returned by the ITextHost::TxImmGetContext method and unlocks the memory associated with the context. This method is used only in Asian-language versions of the operating system. // TxInvalidateRect - Specifies a rectangle for the text host to add to the update region of the text host window. // TxIsDoubleClickPending - Discovers whether the message queue contains a WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK message that is pending for the text host window. // TxKillTimer - Requests the text host to destroy the specified timer. // TxNotify - Notifies the text host of various events. // TxQueryHitPoint - Tests whether a specified point is within the rectangle of the text services object. // TxReleaseDC - Releases the device context obtained by the ITextHost::TxGetDC method. // TxScreenToClient - Converts the screen coordinates to the text host window coordinates. // TxScrollWindowEx - Requests the text host to scroll the content of the specified client area. // TxSendMessage - Used by the window host to forward messages sent from its window to the text services object. // TxSetCapture - Sets the mouse capture in the text host's window. // TxSetCaretPos - Moves the caret position to the specified coordinates in the text host window. // TxSetCursor - Establishes a new cursor shape (I-beam) in the text host's window. // TxSetCursor2 - Sets the shape of the cursor in the text host window. // TxSetFocus - Sets the focus to the text host window. // TxSetForegroundWindow - Sets the rich edit control's host window as the foreground window. // TxSetScrollPos - Sets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar and, if requested, redraws the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. (ITextHost.TxSetScrollPos) // TxSetScrollRange - Sets the minimum and maximum position values for the specified scroll bar in the text host window. // TxSetText - Sets all of the text in the control. // TxSetTimer - Requests the text host to create a timer with a specified time-out. // TxShowCaret - Shows or hides the caret at the caret position in the text host window. // TxShowDropCaret - Shows or hides the caret during the drop portion of a drag-and-drop operation (Direct2D only). // TxShowScrollBar - Shows or hides the scroll bar in the text host window. // TxViewChange - Indicates to the text host that the update region has changed. // TypeText - Types the string given by bstr at this selection as if someone typed it. This is similar to the underlying SetText method, but is sensitive to the Insert/Overtype key state and UI settings like AutoCorrect and smart quotes. // Undo - Performs a specified number of undo operations. // Unfreeze - Decrements the freeze count. // UnicodeToHex - Converts the Unicode character(s) preceding the start position of this text range to a hexadecimal number, and selects it. // UninitializeFlatSB - Uninitializes flat scroll bars for a particular window. The specified window will revert to standard scroll bars. // Update - Updates the selection and caret. // UpdatePanningFeedback - Updates clients about state of a window resulting from a panning gesture. This function can only be called after a BeginPanningFeedback call. // UpdateWindow - Notifies the client that the view has changed and the client should update the view if the Text Object Model (TOM) engine is in-place active. // // LITERATURE_SOURCES // * PHP_NET (2024-04-18) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_controls/ // WINDOWS_CONTROLS - END // // WINDOWS_GDI - BEGIN // Windows GDI // // In this article // Functions // Structures // // Overview of the Windows GDI technology. // // To develop Windows GDI, you need these headers: // * fontsub.h // * mmsystem.h // * prnasnot.h // * prntvpt.h // * t2embapi.h // * tvout.h // * windef.h // * xpsprint.h // // For programming guidance for this technology, see: // * Windows GDI // * Documents and Printing // // Functions // AbortPath - The AbortPath function closes and discards any paths in the specified device context. // AddFontMemResourceEx - The AddFontMemResourceEx function adds the font resource from a memory image to the system. // AddFontResourceA - The AddFontResource function adds the font resource from the specified file to the system font table. The font can subsequently be used for text output by any application. (ANSI) // AddFontResourceExA - The AddFontResourceEx function adds the font resource from the specified file to the system. Fonts added with the AddFontResourceEx function can be marked as private and not enumerable. (ANSI) // AddFontResourceExW - The AddFontResourceEx function adds the font resource from the specified file to the system. Fonts added with the AddFontResourceEx function can be marked as private and not enumerable. (Unicode) // AddFontResourceW - The AddFontResource function adds the font resource from the specified file to the system font table. The font can subsequently be used for text output by any application. (Unicode) // AlphaBlend - The AlphaBlend function displays bitmaps that have transparent or semitransparent pixels. // AngleArc - The AngleArc function draws a line segment and an arc. // AnimatePalette - The AnimatePalette function replaces entries in the specified logical palette. // Arc - The Arc function draws an elliptical arc. // ArcTo - The ArcTo function draws an elliptical arc. // BeginPaint - The BeginPaint function prepares the specified window for painting and fills a PAINTSTRUCT structure with information about the painting. // BeginPath - The BeginPath function opens a path bracket in the specified device context. // BitBlt - The BitBlt function performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source device context into a destination device context. // CancelDC - The CancelDC function cancels any pending operation on the specified device context (DC). // CFP_ALLOCPROC - Client-provided callback function, used by CreateFontPackage and MergeFontPackage to allocate memory. // CFP_FREEPROC - Client-provided callback function, used by CreateFontPackage and MergeFontPackage to free memory. // CFP_REALLOCPROC - Client-provided callback function, used by CreateFontPackage and MergeFontPackage to reallocate memory when the size of an allocated buffer needs to change. // ChangeDisplaySettingsA - The ChangeDisplaySettings function changes the settings of the default display device to the specified graphics mode. (ANSI) // ChangeDisplaySettingsExA - The ChangeDisplaySettingsEx function changes the settings of the specified display device to the specified graphics mode. (ANSI) // ChangeDisplaySettingsExW - The ChangeDisplaySettingsEx function changes the settings of the specified display device to the specified graphics mode. (Unicode) // ChangeDisplaySettingsW - The ChangeDisplaySettings function changes the settings of the default display device to the specified graphics mode. (Unicode) // Chord - The Chord function draws a chord (a region bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and a line segment, called a secant). The chord is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. // ClientToScreen - The ClientToScreen function converts the client-area coordinates of a specified point to screen coordinates. // CloseEnhMetaFile - The CloseEnhMetaFile function closes an enhanced-metafile device context and returns a handle that identifies an enhanced-format metafile. // CloseFigure - The CloseFigure function closes an open figure in a path. // CloseMetaFile - The CloseMetaFile function closes a metafile device context and returns a handle that identifies a Windows-format metafile. // CombineRgn - The CombineRgn function combines two regions and stores the result in a third region. The two regions are combined according to the specified mode. // CombineTransform - The CombineTransform function concatenates two world-space to page-space transformations. // CopyEnhMetaFileA - The CopyEnhMetaFile function copies the contents of an enhanced-format metafile to a specified file. (ANSI) // CopyEnhMetaFileW - The CopyEnhMetaFile function copies the contents of an enhanced-format metafile to a specified file. (Unicode) // CopyMetaFileA - The CopyMetaFile function copies the content of a Windows-format metafile to the specified file. (ANSI) // CopyMetaFileW - The CopyMetaFile function copies the content of a Windows-format metafile to the specified file. (Unicode) // CopyRect - The CopyRect function copies the coordinates of one rectangle to another. // CreateBitmap - The CreateBitmap function creates a bitmap with the specified width, height, and color format (color planes and bits-per-pixel). // CreateBitmapIndirect - The CreateBitmapIndirect function creates a bitmap with the specified width, height, and color format (color planes and bits-per-pixel). // CreateBrushIndirect - The CreateBrushIndirect function creates a logical brush that has the specified style, color, and pattern. // CreateCompatibleBitmap - The CreateCompatibleBitmap function creates a bitmap compatible with the device that is associated with the specified device context. // CreateCompatibleDC - The CreateCompatibleDC function creates a memory device context (DC) compatible with the specified device. // CreateDCA - The CreateDC function creates a device context (DC) for a device using the specified name. (ANSI) // CreateDCW - The CreateDC function creates a device context (DC) for a device using the specified name. (Unicode) // CreateDIBitmap - The CreateDIBitmap function creates a compatible bitmap (DDB) from a DIB and, optionally, sets the bitmap bits. // CreateDIBPatternBrush - The CreateDIBPatternBrush function creates a logical brush that has the pattern specified by the specified device-independent bitmap (DIB). // CreateDIBPatternBrushPt - The CreateDIBPatternBrushPt function creates a logical brush that has the pattern specified by the device-independent bitmap (DIB). // CreateDIBSection - The CreateDIBSection function creates a DIB that applications can write to directly. // CreateDiscardableBitmap - The CreateDiscardableBitmap function creates a discardable bitmap that is compatible with the specified device. // CreateEllipticRgn - The CreateEllipticRgn function creates an elliptical region. // CreateEllipticRgnIndirect - The CreateEllipticRgnIndirect function creates an elliptical region. // CreateEnhMetaFileA - The CreateEnhMetaFile function creates a device context for an enhanced-format metafile. This device context can be used to store a device-independent picture. (ANSI) // CreateEnhMetaFileW - The CreateEnhMetaFile function creates a device context for an enhanced-format metafile. This device context can be used to store a device-independent picture. (Unicode) // CreateFontA - The CreateFont function creates a logical font with the specified characteristics. The logical font can subsequently be selected as the font for any device. (ANSI) // CreateFontIndirectA - The CreateFontIndirect function creates a logical font that has the specified characteristics. The font can subsequently be selected as the current font for any device context. (ANSI) // CreateFontIndirectExA - The CreateFontIndirectEx function specifies a logical font that has the characteristics in the specified structure. The font can subsequently be selected as the current font for any device context. (ANSI) // CreateFontIndirectExW - The CreateFontIndirectEx function specifies a logical font that has the characteristics in the specified structure. The font can subsequently be selected as the current font for any device context. (Unicode) // CreateFontIndirectW - The CreateFontIndirect function creates a logical font that has the specified characteristics. The font can subsequently be selected as the current font for any device context. (Unicode) // CreateFontPackage - The CreateFontPackage function creates a subset version of a specified TrueType font, typically in order to pass it to a printer. // CreateFontW - The CreateFont function creates a logical font with the specified characteristics. The logical font can subsequently be selected as the font for any device. (Unicode) // CreateHalftonePalette - The CreateHalftonePalette function creates a halftone palette for the specified device context (DC). // CreateHatchBrush - The CreateHatchBrush function creates a logical brush that has the specified hatch pattern and color. // CreateICA - The CreateIC function creates an information context for the specified device. (ANSI) // CreateICW - The CreateIC function creates an information context for the specified device. (Unicode) // CreateMetaFileA - The CreateMetaFile function creates a device context for a Windows-format metafile. (ANSI) // CreateMetaFileW - The CreateMetaFile function creates a device context for a Windows-format metafile. (Unicode) // CreatePalette - The CreatePalette function creates a logical palette. // CreatePatternBrush - The CreatePatternBrush function creates a logical brush with the specified bitmap pattern. The bitmap can be a DIB section bitmap, which is created by the CreateDIBSection function, or it can be a device-dependent bitmap. // CreatePen - The CreatePen function creates a logical pen that has the specified style, width, and color. The pen can subsequently be selected into a device context and used to draw lines and curves. // CreatePenIndirect - The CreatePenIndirect function creates a logical cosmetic pen that has the style, width, and color specified in a structure. // CreatePolygonRgn - The CreatePolygonRgn function creates a polygonal region. // CreatePolyPolygonRgn - The CreatePolyPolygonRgn function creates a region consisting of a series of polygons. The polygons can overlap. // CreateRectRgn - The CreateRectRgn function creates a rectangular region. // CreateRectRgnIndirect - The CreateRectRgnIndirect function creates a rectangular region. // CreateRoundRectRgn - The CreateRoundRectRgn function creates a rectangular region with rounded corners. // CreateScalableFontResourceA - The CreateScalableFontResource function creates a font resource file for a scalable font. (ANSI) // CreateScalableFontResourceW - The CreateScalableFontResource function creates a font resource file for a scalable font. (Unicode) // CreateSolidBrush - The CreateSolidBrush function creates a logical brush that has the specified solid color. // DeleteDC - The DeleteDC function deletes the specified device context (DC). // DeleteEnhMetaFile - The DeleteEnhMetaFile function deletes an enhanced-format metafile or an enhanced-format metafile handle. // DeleteFont - The DeleteFont macro deletes a font object, freeing all system resources associated with the font object. // DeleteMetaFile - The DeleteMetaFile function deletes a Windows-format metafile or Windows-format metafile handle. // DeleteObject - The DeleteObject function deletes a logical pen, brush, font, bitmap, region, or palette, freeing all system resources associated with the object. After the object is deleted, the specified handle is no longer valid. // DIBINDEX - The DIBINDEX macro takes an index to an entry in a DIB color table and returns a COLORREF value that specifies the color associated with the given index. // DPtoLP - The DPtoLP function converts device coordinates into logical coordinates. The conversion depends on the mapping mode of the device context, the settings of the origins and extents for the window and viewport, and the world transformation. // DrawAnimatedRects - Animates the caption of a window to indicate the opening of an icon or the minimizing or maximizing of a window. // DrawCaption - The DrawCaption function draws a window caption. // DrawEdge - The DrawEdge function draws one or more edges of rectangle. // DrawEscape - The DrawEscape function provides drawing capabilities of the specified video display that are not directly available through the graphics device interface (GDI). // DrawFocusRect - The DrawFocusRect function draws a rectangle in the style used to indicate that the rectangle has the focus. // DrawFrameControl - The DrawFrameControl function draws a frame control of the specified type and style. // DrawStateA - The DrawState function displays an image and applies a visual effect to indicate a state, such as a disabled or default state. (ANSI) // DRAWSTATEPROC - The DrawStateProc function is an application-defined callback function that renders a complex image for the DrawState function. // DrawStateW - The DrawState function displays an image and applies a visual effect to indicate a state, such as a disabled or default state. (Unicode) // DrawText - The DrawText function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. (DrawText function) // DrawTextA - The DrawText function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. It formats the text according to the specified method (expanding tabs, justifying characters, breaking lines, and so forth). (DrawTextA) // DrawTextExA - The DrawTextEx function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. (ANSI) // DrawTextExW - The DrawTextEx function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. (Unicode) // DrawTextW - The DrawTextW (Unicode) function draws formatted text in the specified rectangle. (DrawTextW function) // Ellipse - The Ellipse function draws an ellipse. The center of the ellipse is the center of the specified bounding rectangle. The ellipse is outlined by using the current pen and is filled by using the current brush. // EndPaint - The EndPaint function marks the end of painting in the specified window. This function is required for each call to the BeginPaint function, but only after painting is complete. // EndPath - The EndPath function closes a path bracket and selects the path defined by the bracket into the specified device context. // ENHMFENUMPROC - The EnhMetaFileProc function is an application-defined callback function used with the EnumEnhMetaFile function. // EnumDisplayDevicesA - The EnumDisplayDevices function lets you obtain information about the display devices in the current session. (ANSI) // EnumDisplayDevicesW - The EnumDisplayDevices function lets you obtain information about the display devices in the current session. (Unicode) // EnumDisplayMonitors - The EnumDisplayMonitors function enumerates display monitors (including invisible pseudo-monitors associated with the mirroring drivers) that intersect a region formed by the intersection of a specified clipping rectangle and the visible region of a device context. EnumDisplayMonitors calls an application-defined MonitorEnumProc callback function once for each monitor that is enumerated. Note that GetSystemMetrics (SM_CMONITORS) counts only the display monitors. // EnumDisplaySettingsA - The EnumDisplaySettings function retrieves information about one of the graphics modes for a display device. To retrieve information for all the graphics modes of a display device, make a series of calls to this function. (ANSI) // EnumDisplaySettingsExA - The EnumDisplaySettingsEx function retrieves information about one of the graphics modes for a display device. To retrieve information for all the graphics modes for a display device, make a series of calls to this function. (ANSI) // EnumDisplaySettingsExW - The EnumDisplaySettingsEx function retrieves information about one of the graphics modes for a display device. To retrieve information for all the graphics modes for a display device, make a series of calls to this function. (Unicode) // EnumDisplaySettingsW - The EnumDisplaySettings function retrieves information about one of the graphics modes for a display device. To retrieve information for all the graphics modes of a display device, make a series of calls to this function. (Unicode) // EnumEnhMetaFile - The EnumEnhMetaFile function enumerates the records within an enhanced-format metafile by retrieving each record and passing it to the specified callback function. // EnumFontFamiliesA - The EnumFontFamilies function enumerates the fonts in a specified font family that are available on a specified device. (ANSI) // EnumFontFamiliesExA - The EnumFontFamiliesEx function enumerates all uniquely-named fonts in the system that match the font characteristics specified by the LOGFONT structure. EnumFontFamiliesEx enumerates fonts based on typeface name, character set, or both. (ANSI) // EnumFontFamiliesExW - The EnumFontFamiliesEx function enumerates all uniquely-named fonts in the system that match the font characteristics specified by the LOGFONT structure. EnumFontFamiliesEx enumerates fonts based on typeface name, character set, or both. (Unicode) // EnumFontFamiliesW - The EnumFontFamilies function enumerates the fonts in a specified font family that are available on a specified device. (Unicode) // EnumFontsA - The EnumFonts function enumerates the fonts available on a specified device. (ANSI) // EnumFontsW - The EnumFonts function enumerates the fonts available on a specified device. (Unicode) // EnumMetaFile - The EnumMetaFile function enumerates the records within a Windows-format metafile by retrieving each record and passing it to the specified callback function. // EnumObjects - The EnumObjects function enumerates the pens or brushes available for the specified device context (DC). // EqualRect - The EqualRect function determines whether the two specified rectangles are equal by comparing the coordinates of their upper-left and lower-right corners. // EqualRgn - The EqualRgn function checks the two specified regions to determine whether they are identical. The function considers two regions identical if they are equal in size and shape. // ExcludeClipRect - The ExcludeClipRect function creates a new clipping region that consists of the existing clipping region minus the specified rectangle. // ExcludeUpdateRgn - The ExcludeUpdateRgn function prevents drawing within invalid areas of a window by excluding an updated region in the window from a clipping region. // ExtCreatePen - The ExtCreatePen function creates a logical cosmetic or geometric pen that has the specified style, width, and brush attributes. // ExtCreateRegion - The ExtCreateRegion function creates a region from the specified region and transformation data. // ExtFloodFill - The ExtFloodFill function fills an area of the display surface with the current brush. // ExtSelectClipRgn - The ExtSelectClipRgn function combines the specified region with the current clipping region using the specified mode. // ExtTextOutA - The ExtTextOut function draws text using the currently selected font, background color, and text color. You can optionally provide dimensions to be used for clipping, opaquing, or both. (ANSI) // ExtTextOutW - The ExtTextOut function draws text using the currently selected font, background color, and text color. You can optionally provide dimensions to be used for clipping, opaquing, or both. (Unicode) // FillPath - The FillPath function closes any open figures in the current path and fills the path's interior by using the current brush and polygon-filling mode. // FillRect - The FillRect function fills a rectangle by using the specified brush. This function includes the left and top borders, but excludes the right and bottom borders of the rectangle. // FillRgn - The FillRgn function fills a region by using the specified brush. // FlattenPath - The FlattenPath function transforms any curves in the path that is selected into the current device context (DC), turning each curve into a sequence of lines. // FloodFill - The FloodFill function fills an area of the display surface with the current brush. The area is assumed to be bounded as specified by the color parameter. // FrameRect - The FrameRect function draws a border around the specified rectangle by using the specified brush. The width and height of the border are always one logical unit. // FrameRgn - The FrameRgn function draws a border around the specified region by using the specified brush. // GdiAlphaBlend - The GdiAlphaBlend function displays bitmaps that have transparent or semitransparent pixels. // GdiComment - The GdiComment function copies a comment from a buffer into a specified enhanced-format metafile. // GdiFlush - The GdiFlush function flushes the calling thread's current batch. // GdiGetBatchLimit - The GdiGetBatchLimit function returns the maximum number of function calls that can be accumulated in the calling thread's current batch. The system flushes the current batch whenever this limit is exceeded. // GdiGradientFill - The GdiGradientFill function fills rectangle and triangle structures. // GdiSetBatchLimit - The GdiSetBatchLimit function sets the maximum number of function calls that can be accumulated in the calling thread's current batch. The system flushes the current batch whenever this limit is exceeded. // GdiTransparentBlt - The GdiTransparentBlt function performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source device context into a destination device context. // GetArcDirection - The GetArcDirection function retrieves the current arc direction for the specified device context. Arc and rectangle functions use the arc direction. // GetAspectRatioFilterEx - The GetAspectRatioFilterEx function retrieves the setting for the current aspect-ratio filter. // GetBitmapBits - The GetBitmapBits function copies the bitmap bits of a specified device-dependent bitmap into a buffer. // GetBitmapDimensionEx - The GetBitmapDimensionEx function retrieves the dimensions of a compatible bitmap. The retrieved dimensions must have been set by the SetBitmapDimensionEx function. // GetBkColor - The GetBkColor function returns the current background color for the specified device context. // GetBkMode - The GetBkMode function returns the current background mix mode for a specified device context. The background mix mode of a device context affects text, hatched brushes, and pen styles that are not solid lines. // GetBoundsRect - The GetBoundsRect function obtains the current accumulated bounding rectangle for a specified device context. // GetBrushOrgEx - The GetBrushOrgEx function retrieves the current brush origin for the specified device context. This function replaces the GetBrushOrg function. // GetBValue - The GetBValue macro retrieves an intensity value for the blue component of a red, green, blue (RGB) value. // GetCharABCWidthsA - The GetCharABCWidths function retrieves the widths, in logical units, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current TrueType font. This function succeeds only with TrueType fonts. (ANSI) // GetCharABCWidthsFloatA - The GetCharABCWidthsFloat function retrieves the widths, in logical units, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (ANSI) // GetCharABCWidthsFloatW - The GetCharABCWidthsFloat function retrieves the widths, in logical units, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (Unicode) // GetCharABCWidthsI - The GetCharABCWidthsI function retrieves the widths, in logical units, of consecutive glyph indices in a specified range from the current TrueType font. This function succeeds only with TrueType fonts. // GetCharABCWidthsW - The GetCharABCWidths function retrieves the widths, in logical units, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current TrueType font. This function succeeds only with TrueType fonts. (Unicode) // GetCharacterPlacementA - The GetCharacterPlacement function retrieves information about a character string, such as character widths, caret positioning, ordering within the string, and glyph rendering. (ANSI) // GetCharacterPlacementW - The GetCharacterPlacement function retrieves information about a character string, such as character widths, caret positioning, ordering within the string, and glyph rendering. (Unicode) // GetCharWidth32A - The GetCharWidth32 function retrieves the widths, in logical coordinates, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (ANSI) // GetCharWidth32W - The GetCharWidth32 function retrieves the widths, in logical coordinates, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (Unicode) // GetCharWidthA - The GetCharWidth function retrieves the widths, in logical coordinates, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (ANSI) // GetCharWidthFloatA - The GetCharWidthFloat function retrieves the fractional widths of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (ANSI) // GetCharWidthFloatW - The GetCharWidthFloat function retrieves the fractional widths of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (Unicode) // GetCharWidthI - The GetCharWidthI function retrieves the widths, in logical coordinates, of consecutive glyph indices in a specified range from the current font. // GetCharWidthW - The GetCharWidth function retrieves the widths, in logical coordinates, of consecutive characters in a specified range from the current font. (Unicode) // GetClipBox - The GetClipBox function retrieves the dimensions of the tightest bounding rectangle that can be drawn around the current visible area on the device. // GetClipRgn - The GetClipRgn function retrieves a handle identifying the current application-defined clipping region for the specified device context. // GetColorAdjustment - The GetColorAdjustment function retrieves the color adjustment values for the specified device context (DC). // GetCurrentObject - The GetCurrentObject function retrieves a handle to an object of the specified type that has been selected into the specified device context (DC). // GetCurrentPositionEx - The GetCurrentPositionEx function retrieves the current position in logical coordinates. // GetDC - The GetDC function retrieves a handle to a device context (DC) for the client area of a specified window or for the entire screen. // GetDCBrushColor - The GetDCBrushColor function retrieves the current brush color for the specified device context (DC). // GetDCEx - The GetDCEx function retrieves a handle to a device context (DC) for the client area of a specified window or for the entire screen. // GetDCOrgEx - The GetDCOrgEx function retrieves the final translation origin for a specified device context (DC). // GetDCPenColor - The GetDCPenColor function retrieves the current pen color for the specified device context (DC). // GetDeviceCaps - The GetDeviceCaps function retrieves device-specific information for the specified device. // GetDIBColorTable - The GetDIBColorTable function retrieves RGB (red, green, blue) color values from a range of entries in the color table of the DIB section bitmap that is currently selected into a specified device context. // GetDIBits - The GetDIBits function retrieves the bits of the specified compatible bitmap and copies them into a buffer as a DIB using the specified format. // GetEnhMetaFileA - The GetEnhMetaFile function creates a handle that identifies the enhanced-format metafile stored in the specified file. (ANSI) // GetEnhMetaFileBits - The GetEnhMetaFileBits function retrieves the contents of the specified enhanced-format metafile and copies them into a buffer. // GetEnhMetaFileDescriptionA - The GetEnhMetaFileDescription function retrieves an optional text description from an enhanced-format metafile and copies the string to the specified buffer. (ANSI) // GetEnhMetaFileDescriptionW - The GetEnhMetaFileDescription function retrieves an optional text description from an enhanced-format metafile and copies the string to the specified buffer. (Unicode) // GetEnhMetaFileHeader - The GetEnhMetaFileHeader function retrieves the record containing the header for the specified enhanced-format metafile. // GetEnhMetaFilePaletteEntries - The GetEnhMetaFilePaletteEntries function retrieves optional palette entries from the specified enhanced metafile. // GetEnhMetaFileW - The GetEnhMetaFile function creates a handle that identifies the enhanced-format metafile stored in the specified file. (Unicode) // GetFontData - The GetFontData function retrieves font metric data for a TrueType font. // GetFontLanguageInfo - The GetFontLanguageInfo function returns information about the currently selected font for the specified display context. Applications typically use this information and the GetCharacterPlacement function to prepare a character string for display. // GetFontUnicodeRanges - The GetFontUnicodeRanges function returns information about which Unicode characters are supported by a font. The information is returned as a GLYPHSET structure. // GetGlyphIndicesA - The GetGlyphIndices function translates a string into an array of glyph indices. The function can be used to determine whether a glyph exists in a font. (ANSI) // GetGlyphIndicesW - The GetGlyphIndices function translates a string into an array of glyph indices. The function can be used to determine whether a glyph exists in a font. (Unicode) // GetGlyphOutlineA - The GetGlyphOutline function retrieves the outline or bitmap for a character in the TrueType font that is selected into the specified device context. (ANSI) // GetGlyphOutlineW - The GetGlyphOutline function retrieves the outline or bitmap for a character in the TrueType font that is selected into the specified device context. (Unicode) // GetGraphicsMode - The GetGraphicsMode function retrieves the current graphics mode for the specified device context. // GetGValue - The GetGValue macro retrieves an intensity value for the green component of a red, green, blue (RGB) value. // GetKerningPairsA - The GetKerningPairs function retrieves the character-kerning pairs for the currently selected font for the specified device context. (ANSI) // GetKerningPairsW - The GetKerningPairs function retrieves the character-kerning pairs for the currently selected font for the specified device context. (Unicode) // GetLayout - The GetLayout function returns the layout of a device context (DC). // GetMapMode - The GetMapMode function retrieves the current mapping mode. // GetMetaFileA - The GetMetaFile function creates a handle that identifies the metafile stored in the specified file. (ANSI) // GetMetaFileBitsEx - The GetMetaFileBitsEx function retrieves the contents of a Windows-format metafile and copies them into the specified buffer. // GetMetaFileW - The GetMetaFile function creates a handle that identifies the metafile stored in the specified file. (Unicode) // GetMetaRgn - The GetMetaRgn function retrieves the current metaregion for the specified device context. // GetMiterLimit - The GetMiterLimit function retrieves the miter limit for the specified device context. // GetMonitorInfoA - The GetMonitorInfo function retrieves information about a display monitor. (ANSI) // GetMonitorInfoW - The GetMonitorInfo function retrieves information about a display monitor. (Unicode) // GetNearestColor - The GetNearestColor function retrieves a color value identifying a color from the system palette that will be displayed when the specified color value is used. // GetNearestPaletteIndex - The GetNearestPaletteIndex function retrieves the index for the entry in the specified logical palette most closely matching a specified color value. // GetObject - The GetObject function (wingdi.h) retrieves information for the specified graphics object. // GetObjectA - The GetObject function retrieves information for the specified graphics object. (GetObjectA) // GetObjectType - The GetObjectType retrieves the type of the specified object. // GetObjectW - The GetObjectW (Unicode) function (wingdi.h) retrieves information for the specified graphics object. // GetOutlineTextMetricsA - The GetOutlineTextMetrics function retrieves text metrics for TrueType fonts. (ANSI) // GetOutlineTextMetricsW - The GetOutlineTextMetrics function retrieves text metrics for TrueType fonts. (Unicode) // GetPaletteEntries - The GetPaletteEntries function retrieves a specified range of palette entries from the given logical palette. // GetPath - The GetPath function retrieves the coordinates defining the endpoints of lines and the control points of curves found in the path that is selected into the specified device context. // GetPixel - The GetPixel function retrieves the red, green, blue (RGB) color value of the pixel at the specified coordinates. // GetPolyFillMode - The GetPolyFillMode function retrieves the current polygon fill mode. // GetRandomRgn - The GetRandomRgn function copies the system clipping region of a specified device context to a specific region. // GetRasterizerCaps - The GetRasterizerCaps function returns flags indicating whether TrueType fonts are installed in the system. // GetRegionData - The GetRegionData function fills the specified buffer with data describing a region. This data includes the dimensions of the rectangles that make up the region. // GetRgnBox - The GetRgnBox function retrieves the bounding rectangle of the specified region. // GetROP2 - The GetROP2 function retrieves the foreground mix mode of the specified device context. The mix mode specifies how the pen or interior color and the color already on the screen are combined to yield a new color. // GetRValue - The GetRValue macro retrieves an intensity value for the red component of a red, green, blue (RGB) value. // GetStockObject - The GetStockObject function retrieves a handle to one of the stock pens, brushes, fonts, or palettes. // GetStretchBltMode - The GetStretchBltMode function retrieves the current stretching mode. The stretching mode defines how color data is added to or removed from bitmaps that are stretched or compressed when the StretchBlt function is called. // GetSysColorBrush - The GetSysColorBrush function retrieves a handle identifying a logical brush that corresponds to the specified color index. // GetSystemPaletteEntries - The GetSystemPaletteEntries function retrieves a range of palette entries from the system palette that is associated with the specified device context (DC). // GetSystemPaletteUse - The GetSystemPaletteUse function retrieves the current state of the system (physical) palette for the specified device context (DC). // GetTabbedTextExtentA - The GetTabbedTextExtent function computes the width and height of a character string. (ANSI) // GetTabbedTextExtentW - The GetTabbedTextExtent function computes the width and height of a character string. (Unicode) // GetTextAlign - The GetTextAlign function retrieves the text-alignment setting for the specified device context. // GetTextCharacterExtra - The GetTextCharacterExtra function retrieves the current intercharacter spacing for the specified device context. // GetTextColor - The GetTextColor function retrieves the current text color for the specified device context. // GetTextExtentExPointA - The GetTextExtentExPoint function retrieves the number of characters in a specified string that will fit within a specified space and fills an array with the text extent for each of those characters. (ANSI) // GetTextExtentExPointI - The GetTextExtentExPointI function retrieves the number of characters in a specified string that will fit within a specified space and fills an array with the text extent for each of those characters. // GetTextExtentExPointW - The GetTextExtentExPoint function retrieves the number of characters in a specified string that will fit within a specified space and fills an array with the text extent for each of those characters. (Unicode) // GetTextExtentPoint32A - The GetTextExtentPoint32 function computes the width and height of the specified string of text. (ANSI) // GetTextExtentPoint32W - The GetTextExtentPoint32 function computes the width and height of the specified string of text. (Unicode) // GetTextExtentPointA - The GetTextExtentPoint function computes the width and height of the specified string of text. (ANSI) // GetTextExtentPointI - The GetTextExtentPointI function computes the width and height of the specified array of glyph indices. // GetTextExtentPointW - The GetTextExtentPoint function computes the width and height of the specified string of text. (Unicode) // GetTextFaceA - The GetTextFace function retrieves the typeface name of the font that is selected into the specified device context. (ANSI) // GetTextFaceW - The GetTextFace function retrieves the typeface name of the font that is selected into the specified device context. (Unicode) // GetTextMetrics - The GetTextMetrics function (wingdi.h) fills the specified buffer with the metrics for the currently selected font. // GetTextMetricsA - The GetTextMetrics function fills the specified buffer with the metrics for the currently selected font. (GetTextMetricsA) // GetTextMetricsW - The GetTextMetricsW (Unicode) function (wingdi.h) fills the specified buffer with the metrics for the currently selected font. // GetUpdateRect - The GetUpdateRect function retrieves the coordinates of the smallest rectangle that completely encloses the update region of the specified window. // GetUpdateRgn - The GetUpdateRgn function retrieves the update region of a window by copying it into the specified region. The coordinates of the update region are relative to the upper-left corner of the window (that is, they are client coordinates). // GetViewportExtEx - The GetViewportExtEx function retrieves the x-extent and y-extent of the current viewport for the specified device context. // GetViewportOrgEx - The GetViewportOrgEx function retrieves the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the viewport origin for the specified device context. // GetWindowDC - The GetWindowDC function retrieves the device context (DC) for the entire window, including title bar, menus, and scroll bars. // GetWindowExtEx - This function retrieves the x-extent and y-extent of the window for the specified device context. // GetWindowOrgEx - The GetWindowOrgEx function retrieves the x-coordinates and y-coordinates of the window origin for the specified device context. // GetWindowRgn - The GetWindowRgn function obtains a copy of the window region of a window. // GetWindowRgnBox - The GetWindowRgnBox function retrieves the dimensions of the tightest bounding rectangle for the window region of a window. // GetWinMetaFileBits - The GetWinMetaFileBits function converts the enhanced-format records from a metafile into Windows-format records and stores the converted records in the specified buffer. // GetWorldTransform - The GetWorldTransform function retrieves the current world-space to page-space transformation. // GOBJENUMPROC - The EnumObjectsProc function is an application-defined callback function used with the EnumObjects function. // GradientFill - The GradientFill function fills rectangle and triangle structures. // GrayStringA - The GrayString function draws gray text at the specified location. (ANSI) // GRAYSTRINGPROC - The OutputProc function is an application-defined callback function used with the GrayString function. // GrayStringW - The GrayString function draws gray text at the specified location. (Unicode) // InflateRect - The InflateRect function increases or decreases the width and height of the specified rectangle. // IntersectClipRect - The IntersectClipRect function creates a new clipping region from the intersection of the current clipping region and the specified rectangle. // IntersectRect - The IntersectRect function calculates the intersection of two source rectangles and places the coordinates of the intersection rectangle into the destination rectangle. // InvalidateRect - The InvalidateRect function adds a rectangle to the specified window's update region. The update region represents the portion of the window's client area that must be redrawn. // InvalidateRgn - The InvalidateRgn function invalidates the client area within the specified region by adding it to the current update region of a window. // InvertRect - The InvertRect function inverts a rectangle in a window by performing a logical NOT operation on the color values for each pixel in the rectangle's interior. // InvertRgn - The InvertRgn function inverts the colors in the specified region. // IsRectEmpty - The IsRectEmpty function determines whether the specified rectangle is empty. // LineDDA - The LineDDA function determines which pixels should be highlighted for a line defined by the specified starting and ending points. // LINEDDAPROC - The LineDDAProc function is an application-defined callback function used with the LineDDA function. // LineTo - The LineTo function draws a line from the current position up to, but not including, the specified point. // LoadBitmapA - The LoadBitmap function loads the specified bitmap resource from a module's executable file. (ANSI) // LoadBitmapW - The LoadBitmap function loads the specified bitmap resource from a module's executable file. (Unicode) // LockWindowUpdate - The LockWindowUpdate function disables or enables drawing in the specified window. Only one window can be locked at a time. // LPtoDP - The LPtoDP function converts logical coordinates into device coordinates. The conversion depends on the mapping mode of the device context, the settings of the origins and extents for the window and viewport, and the world transformation. // MAKEPOINTS - The MAKEPOINTS macro converts a value that contains the x- and y-coordinates of a point into a POINTS structure. // MAKEROP4 - The MAKEROP4 macro creates a quaternary raster operation code for use with the MaskBlt function. // MapWindowPoints - The MapWindowPoints function converts (maps) a set of points from a coordinate space relative to one window to a coordinate space relative to another window. // MaskBlt - The MaskBlt function combines the color data for the source and destination bitmaps using the specified mask and raster operation. // MergeFontPackage - The MergeFontPackage function manipulates fonts created by CreateFontPackage. // MFENUMPROC - The EnumMetaFileProc function is an application-defined callback function that processes Windows-format metafile records. // ModifyWorldTransform - The ModifyWorldTransform function changes the world transformation for a device context using the specified mode. // MONITORENUMPROC - A MonitorEnumProc function is an application-defined callback function that is called by the EnumDisplayMonitors function. // MonitorFromPoint - The MonitorFromPoint function retrieves a handle to the display monitor that contains a specified point. // MonitorFromRect - The MonitorFromRect function retrieves a handle to the display monitor that has the largest area of intersection with a specified rectangle. // MonitorFromWindow - The MonitorFromWindow function retrieves a handle to the display monitor that has the largest area of intersection with the bounding rectangle of a specified window. // MoveToEx - The MoveToEx function updates the current position to the specified point and optionally returns the previous position. // OffsetClipRgn - The OffsetClipRgn function moves the clipping region of a device context by the specified offsets. // OffsetRect - The OffsetRect function moves the specified rectangle by the specified offsets. // OffsetRgn - The OffsetRgn function moves a region by the specified offsets. // OffsetViewportOrgEx - The OffsetViewportOrgEx function modifies the viewport origin for a device context using the specified horizontal and vertical offsets. // OffsetWindowOrgEx - The OffsetWindowOrgEx function modifies the window origin for a device context using the specified horizontal and vertical offsets. // PaintDesktop - The PaintDesktop function fills the clipping region in the specified device context with the desktop pattern or wallpaper. The function is provided primarily for shell desktops. // PaintRgn - The PaintRgn function paints the specified region by using the brush currently selected into the device context. // PALETTEINDEX - The PALETTEINDEX macro accepts an index to a logical-color palette entry and returns a palette-entry specifier consisting of a COLORREF value that specifies the color associated with the given index. // PALETTERGB - The PALETTERGB macro accepts three values that represent the relative intensities of red, green, and blue and returns a palette-relative red, green, blue (RGB) specifier consisting of 2 in the high-order byte and an RGB value in the three low-order bytes. An application using a color palette can pass this specifier, instead of an explicit RGB value, to functions that expect a color. // PatBlt - The PatBlt function paints the specified rectangle using the brush that is currently selected into the specified device context. The brush color and the surface color or colors are combined by using the specified raster operation. // PathToRegion - The PathToRegion function creates a region from the path that is selected into the specified device context. The resulting region uses device coordinates. // Pie - The Pie function draws a pie-shaped wedge bounded by the intersection of an ellipse and two radials. The pie is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. // PlayEnhMetaFile - The PlayEnhMetaFile function displays the picture stored in the specified enhanced-format metafile. // PlayEnhMetaFileRecord - The PlayEnhMetaFileRecord function plays an enhanced-metafile record by executing the graphics device interface (GDI) functions identified by the record. // PlayMetaFile - The PlayMetaFile function displays the picture stored in the given Windows-format metafile on the specified device. // PlayMetaFileRecord - The PlayMetaFileRecord function plays a Windows-format metafile record by executing the graphics device interface (GDI) function contained within that record. // PlgBlt - The PlgBlt function performs a bit-block transfer of the bits of color data from the specified rectangle in the source device context to the specified parallelogram in the destination device context. // POINTSTOPOINT - The POINTSTOPOINT macro copies the contents of a POINTS structure into a POINT structure. // POINTTOPOINTS - The POINTTOPOINTS macro converts a POINT structure to a POINTS structure. // PolyBezier - The PolyBezier function draws one or more B�zier curves. // PolyBezierTo - The PolyBezierTo function draws one or more B�zier curves. // PolyDraw - The PolyDraw function draws a set of line segments and B�zier curves. // Polygon - The Polygon function draws a polygon consisting of two or more vertices connected by straight lines. The polygon is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. // Polyline - The Polyline function draws a series of line segments by connecting the points in the specified array. // PolylineTo - The PolylineTo function draws one or more straight lines. // PolyPolygon - The PolyPolygon function draws a series of closed polygons. Each polygon is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush and polygon fill mode. The polygons drawn by this function can overlap. // PolyPolyline - The PolyPolyline function draws multiple series of connected line segments. // PolyTextOutA - The PolyTextOut function draws several strings using the font and text colors currently selected in the specified device context. (ANSI) // PolyTextOutW - The PolyTextOut function draws several strings using the font and text colors currently selected in the specified device context. (Unicode) // PtInRect - The PtInRect function determines whether the specified point lies within the specified rectangle. // PtInRegion - The PtInRegion function determines whether the specified point is inside the specified region. // PtVisible - The PtVisible function determines whether the specified point is within the clipping region of a device context. // RealizePalette - The RealizePalette function maps palette entries from the current logical palette to the system palette. // Rectangle - The Rectangle function draws a rectangle. The rectangle is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. // RectInRegion - The RectInRegion function determines whether any part of the specified rectangle is within the boundaries of a region. // RectVisible - The RectVisible function determines whether any part of the specified rectangle lies within the clipping region of a device context. // RedrawWindow - The RedrawWindow function updates the specified rectangle or region in a window's client area. // ReleaseDC - The ReleaseDC function releases a device context (DC), freeing it for use by other applications. The effect of the ReleaseDC function depends on the type of DC. It frees only common and window DCs. It has no effect on class or private DCs. // RemoveFontMemResourceEx - The RemoveFontMemResourceEx function removes the fonts added from a memory image file. // RemoveFontResourceA - The RemoveFontResource function removes the fonts in the specified file from the system font table. (ANSI) // RemoveFontResourceExA - The RemoveFontResourceEx function removes the fonts in the specified file from the system font table. (ANSI) // RemoveFontResourceExW - The RemoveFontResourceEx function removes the fonts in the specified file from the system font table. (Unicode) // RemoveFontResourceW - The RemoveFontResource function removes the fonts in the specified file from the system font table. (Unicode) // ResetDCA - The ResetDC function updates the specified printer or plotter device context (DC) using the specified information. (ANSI) // ResetDCW - The ResetDC function updates the specified printer or plotter device context (DC) using the specified information. (Unicode) // ResizePalette - The ResizePalette function increases or decreases the size of a logical palette based on the specified value. // RestoreDC - The RestoreDC function restores a device context (DC) to the specified state. The DC is restored by popping state information off a stack created by earlier calls to the SaveDC function. // RGB - The RGB macro selects a red, green, blue (RGB) color based on the arguments supplied and the color capabilities of the output device. // RoundRect - The RoundRect function draws a rectangle with rounded corners. The rectangle is outlined by using the current pen and filled by using the current brush. // SaveDC - The SaveDC function saves the current state of the specified device context (DC) by copying data describing selected objects and graphic modes (such as the bitmap, brush, palette, font, pen, region, drawing mode, and mapping mode) to a context stack. // ScaleViewportExtEx - The ScaleViewportExtEx function modifies the viewport for a device context using the ratios formed by the specified multiplicands and divisors. // ScaleWindowExtEx - The ScaleWindowExtEx function modifies the window for a device context using the ratios formed by the specified multiplicands and divisors. // ScreenToClient - The ScreenToClient function converts the screen coordinates of a specified point on the screen to client-area coordinates. // SelectClipPath - The SelectClipPath function selects the current path as a clipping region for a device context, combining the new region with any existing clipping region using the specified mode. // SelectClipRgn - The SelectClipRgn function selects a region as the current clipping region for the specified device context. // SelectFont - The SelectFont macro selects a font object into the specified device context (DC). The new font object replaces the previous font object. // SelectObject - The SelectObject function selects an object into the specified device context (DC). The new object replaces the previous object of the same type. // SelectPalette - The SelectPalette function selects the specified logical palette into a device context. // SetArcDirection - The SetArcDirection sets the drawing direction to be used for arc and rectangle functions. // SetBitmapBits - The SetBitmapBits function sets the bits of color data for a bitmap to the specified values. // SetBitmapDimensionEx - The SetBitmapDimensionEx function assigns preferred dimensions to a bitmap. These dimensions can be used by applications; however, they are not used by the system. // SetBkColor - The SetBkColor function sets the current background color to the specified color value, or to the nearest physical color if the device cannot represent the specified color value. // SetBkMode - The SetBkMode function sets the background mix mode of the specified device context. The background mix mode is used with text, hatched brushes, and pen styles that are not solid lines. // SetBoundsRect - The SetBoundsRect function controls the accumulation of bounding rectangle information for the specified device context. // SetBrushOrgEx - The SetBrushOrgEx function sets the brush origin that GDI assigns to the next brush an application selects into the specified device context. // SetColorAdjustment - The SetColorAdjustment function sets the color adjustment values for a device context (DC) using the specified values. // SetDCBrushColor - SetDCBrushColor function sets the current device context (DC) brush color to the specified color value. If the device cannot represent the specified color value, the color is set to the nearest physical color. // SetDCPenColor - SetDCPenColor function sets the current device context (DC) pen color to the specified color value. If the device cannot represent the specified color value, the color is set to the nearest physical color. // SetDIBColorTable - The SetDIBColorTable function sets RGB (red, green, blue) color values in a range of entries in the color table of the DIB that is currently selected into a specified device context. // SetDIBits - The SetDIBits function sets the pixels in a compatible bitmap (DDB) using the color data found in the specified DIB. // SetDIBitsToDevice - The SetDIBitsToDevice function sets the pixels in the specified rectangle on the device that is associated with the destination device context using color data from a DIB, JPEG, or PNG image. // SetEnhMetaFileBits - The SetEnhMetaFileBits function creates a memory-based enhanced-format metafile from the specified data. // SetGraphicsMode - The SetGraphicsMode function sets the graphics mode for the specified device context. // SetLayout - The SetLayout function changes the layout of a device context (DC). // SetMapMode - The SetMapMode function sets the mapping mode of the specified device context. The mapping mode defines the unit of measure used to transform page-space units into device-space units, and also defines the orientation of the device's x and y axes. // SetMapperFlags - The SetMapperFlags function alters the algorithm the font mapper uses when it maps logical fonts to physical fonts. // SetMetaFileBitsEx - The SetMetaFileBitsEx function creates a memory-based Windows-format metafile from the supplied data. // SetMetaRgn - The SetMetaRgn function intersects the current clipping region for the specified device context with the current metaregion and saves the combined region as the new metaregion for the specified device context. // SetMiterLimit - The SetMiterLimit function sets the limit for the length of miter joins for the specified device context. // SetPaletteEntries - The SetPaletteEntries function sets RGB (red, green, blue) color values and flags in a range of entries in a logical palette. // SetPixel - The SetPixel function sets the pixel at the specified coordinates to the specified color. // SetPixelV - The SetPixelV function sets the pixel at the specified coordinates to the closest approximation of the specified color. The point must be in the clipping region and the visible part of the device surface. // SetPolyFillMode - The SetPolyFillMode function sets the polygon fill mode for functions that fill polygons. // SetRect - The SetRect function sets the coordinates of the specified rectangle. This is equivalent to assigning the left, top, right, and bottom arguments to the appropriate members of the RECT structure. // SetRectEmpty - The SetRectEmpty function creates an empty rectangle in which all coordinates are set to zero. // SetRectRgn - The SetRectRgn function converts a region into a rectangular region with the specified coordinates. // SetROP2 - The SetROP2 function sets the current foreground mix mode. // SetStretchBltMode - The SetStretchBltMode function sets the bitmap stretching mode in the specified device context. // SetSystemPaletteUse - The SetSystemPaletteUse function allows an application to specify whether the system palette contains 2 or 20 static colors. // SetTextAlign - The SetTextAlign function sets the text-alignment flags for the specified device context. // SetTextCharacterExtra - The SetTextCharacterExtra function sets the intercharacter spacing. Intercharacter spacing is added to each character, including break characters, when the system writes a line of text. // SetTextColor - The SetTextColor function sets the text color for the specified device context to the specified color. // SetTextJustification - The SetTextJustification function specifies the amount of space the system should add to the break characters in a string of text. The space is added when an application calls the TextOut or ExtTextOut functions. // SetViewportExtEx - Sets the horizontal and vertical extents of the viewport for a device context by using the specified values. // SetViewportOrgEx - The SetViewportOrgEx function specifies which device point maps to the window origin (0,0). // SetWindowExtEx - The SetWindowExtEx function sets the horizontal and vertical extents of the window for a device context by using the specified values. // SetWindowOrgEx - The SetWindowOrgEx function specifies which window point maps to the viewport origin (0,0). // SetWindowRgn - The SetWindowRgn function sets the window region of a window. // SetWinMetaFileBits - The SetWinMetaFileBits function converts a metafile from the older Windows format to the new enhanced format and stores the new metafile in memory. // SetWorldTransform - The SetWorldTransform function sets a two-dimensional linear transformation between world space and page space for the specified device context. This transformation can be used to scale, rotate, shear, or translate graphics output. // StretchBlt - The StretchBlt function copies a bitmap from a source rectangle into a destination rectangle, stretching or compressing the bitmap to fit the dimensions of the destination rectangle, if necessary. // StretchDIBits - The StretchDIBits function copies the color data for a rectangle of pixels in a DIB, JPEG, or PNG image to the specified destination rectangle. // StrokeAndFillPath - The StrokeAndFillPath function closes any open figures in a path, strokes the outline of the path by using the current pen, and fills its interior by using the current brush. // StrokePath - The StrokePath function renders the specified path by using the current pen. // SubtractRect - The SubtractRect function determines the coordinates of a rectangle formed by subtracting one rectangle from another. // TabbedTextOutA - The TabbedTextOut function writes a character string at a specified location, expanding tabs to the values specified in an array of tab-stop positions. Text is written in the currently selected font, background color, and text color. (ANSI) // TabbedTextOutW - The TabbedTextOut function writes a character string at a specified location, expanding tabs to the values specified in an array of tab-stop positions. Text is written in the currently selected font, background color, and text color. (Unicode) // TextOutA - The TextOut function writes a character string at the specified location, using the currently selected font, background color, and text color. (ANSI) // TextOutW - The TextOut function writes a character string at the specified location, using the currently selected font, background color, and text color. (Unicode) // TransparentBlt - The TransparentBlt function performs a bit-block transfer of the color data corresponding to a rectangle of pixels from the specified source device context into a destination device context. // TTCharToUnicode - Converts an array of 8-bit character code values to 16-bit Unicode values. // TTDeleteEmbeddedFont - Releases memory used by an embedded font, hFontReference. // TTEmbedFont - Creates a font structure containing the subsetted wide-character (16-bit) font. The current font of the device context (hDC) provides the font information. // TTEmbedFontEx - Creates a font structure containing the subsetted UCS-4 character (32-bit) font. The current font of the device context (hDC) provides the font information. // TTEmbedFontFromFileA - Creates a font structure containing the subsetted wide-character (16-bit) font. An external file provides the font information. // TTEnableEmbeddingForFacename - Adds or removes facenames from the typeface exclusion list. // TTGetEmbeddedFontInfo - Retrieves information about an embedded font, such as embedding permissions. TTGetEmbeddedFontInfo performs the same task as TTLoadEmbeddedFont but does not allocate internal data structures for the embedded font. // TTGetEmbeddingType - Obtains the embedding privileges of a font. // TTGetNewFontName - Obtains the family name for the font loaded through TTLoadEmbeddedFont. // TTIsEmbeddingEnabled - Determines whether the typeface exclusion list contains a specified font. // TTIsEmbeddingEnabledForFacename - Determines whether embedding is enabled for a specified font. // TTLoadEmbeddedFont - Reads an embedded font from the document stream and installs it. Also allows a client to further restrict embedding privileges of the font. // TTRunValidationTests - Validates part or all glyph data of a wide-character (16-bit) font, in the size range specified. // TTRunValidationTestsEx - Validates part or all glyph data of a UCS-4 character (32-bit) font, in the size range specified. // UnionRect - The UnionRect function creates the union of two rectangles. The union is the smallest rectangle that contains both source rectangles. // UnrealizeObject - The UnrealizeObject function resets the origin of a brush or resets a logical palette. // UpdateColors - The UpdateColors function updates the client area of the specified device context by remapping the current colors in the client area to the currently realized logical palette. // UpdateWindow - The UpdateWindow function updates the client area of the specified window by sending a WM_PAINT message to the window if the window's update region is not empty. // ValidateRect - The ValidateRect function validates the client area within a rectangle by removing the rectangle from the update region of the specified window. // ValidateRgn - The ValidateRgn function validates the client area within a region by removing the region from the current update region of the specified window. // WidenPath - The WidenPath function redefines the current path as the area that would be painted if the path were stroked using the pen currently selected into the given device context. // WindowFromDC - The WindowFromDC function returns a handle to the window associated with the specified display device context (DC). Output functions that use the specified device context draw into this window. // // Structures // ABC - The ABC structure contains the width of a character in a TrueType font. // ABCFLOAT - The ABCFLOAT structure contains the A, B, and C widths of a font character. // AXESLISTA - The AXESLIST structure contains information on all the axes of a multiple master font. (ANSI) // AXESLISTW - The AXESLIST structure contains information on all the axes of a multiple master font. (Unicode) // AXISINFOA - The AXISINFO structure contains information about an axis of a multiple master font. (ANSI) // AXISINFOW - The AXISINFO structure contains information about an axis of a multiple master font. (Unicode) // BITMAP - The BITMAP structure defines the type, width, height, color format, and bit values of a bitmap. // BITMAPCOREHEADER - The BITMAPCOREHEADER structure contains information about the dimensions and color format of a DIB. // BITMAPCOREINFO - The BITMAPCOREINFO structure defines the dimensions and color information for a DIB. // BITMAPFILEHEADER - The BITMAPFILEHEADER structure contains information about the type, size, and layout of a file that contains a DIB. // BITMAPINFO - The BITMAPINFO structure defines the dimensions and color information for a DIB. // BITMAPINFOHEADER - The BITMAPINFOHEADER structure contains information about the dimensions and color format of a device-independent bitmap (DIB). // BITMAPV4HEADER - The BITMAPV4HEADER structure is the bitmap information header file. It is an extended version of the BITMAPINFOHEADER structure.Applications can use the BITMAPV5HEADER structure for added functionality. // BITMAPV5HEADER - The BITMAPV5HEADER structure is the bitmap information header file. It is an extended version of the BITMAPINFOHEADER structure. // BLENDFUNCTION - The BLENDFUNCTION structure controls blending by specifying the blending functions for source and destination bitmaps. // COLORADJUSTMENT - The COLORADJUSTMENT structure defines the color adjustment values used by the StretchBlt and StretchDIBits functions when the stretch mode is HALFTONE. You can set the color adjustment values by calling the SetColorAdjustment function. // DESIGNVECTOR - The DESIGNVECTOR structure is used by an application to specify values for the axes of a multiple master font. // DIBSECTION - The DIBSECTION structure contains information about a DIB created by calling the CreateDIBSection function. // DISPLAY_DEVICEA - The DISPLAY_DEVICE structure receives information about the display device specified by the iDevNum parameter of the EnumDisplayDevices function. (ANSI) // DISPLAY_DEVICEW - The DISPLAY_DEVICE structure receives information about the display device specified by the iDevNum parameter of the EnumDisplayDevices function. (Unicode) // DRAWTEXTPARAMS - The DRAWTEXTPARAMS structure contains extended formatting options for the DrawTextEx function. // EMR - The EMR structure provides the base structure for all enhanced metafile records. An enhanced metafile record contains the parameters for a specific GDI function used to create part of a picture in an enhanced format metafile. // EMRABORTPATH - Contains data for the AbortPath, BeginPath, EndPath, CloseFigure, FlattenPath, WidenPath, SetMetaRgn, SaveDC, and RealizePalette enhanced metafile records. // EMRALPHABLEND - The EMRALPHABLEND structure contains members for the AlphaBlend enhanced metafile record. // EMRANGLEARC - The EMRANGLEARC structure contains members for the AngleArc enhanced metafile record. // EMRARC - The EMRARC, EMRARCTO, EMRCHORD, and EMRPIE structures contain members for the Arc, ArcTo, Chord, and Pie enhanced metafile records. // EMRBITBLT - The EMRBITBLT structure contains members for the BitBlt enhanced metafile record. Note that graphics device interface (GDI) converts the device-dependent bitmap into a device-independent bitmap (DIB) before storing it in the metafile record. // EMRCOLORCORRECTPALETTE - The EMRCOLORCORRECTPALETTE structure contains members for the ColorCorrectPalette enhanced metafile record. // EMRCOLORMATCHTOTARGET - The EMRCOLORMATCHTOTARGET structure contains members for the ColorMatchToTarget enhanced metafile record. // EMRCREATEBRUSHINDIRECT - The EMRCREATEBRUSHINDIRECT structure contains members for the CreateBrushIndirect enhanced metafile record. // EMRCREATECOLORSPACE - The EMRCREATECOLORSPACE structure contains members for the CreateColorSpace enhanced metafile record. // EMRCREATECOLORSPACEW - The EMRCREATECOLORSPACEW structure contains members for the CreateColorSpace enhanced metafile record. It differs from EMRCREATECOLORSPACE in that it has a Unicode logical color space and also has an optional array containing raw source profile data. // EMRCREATEDIBPATTERNBRUSHPT - The EMRCREATEDIBPATTERNBRUSHPT structure contains members for the CreateDIBPatternBrushPt enhanced metafile record. The BITMAPINFO structure is followed by the bitmap bits that form a packed device-independent bitmap (DIB). // EMRCREATEMONOBRUSH - The EMRCREATEMONOBRUSH structure contains members for the CreatePatternBrush (when passed a monochrome bitmap) or CreateDIBPatternBrush (when passed a monochrome DIB) enhanced metafile records. // EMRCREATEPALETTE - The EMRCREATEPALETTE structure contains members for the CreatePalette enhanced metafile record. // EMRCREATEPEN - The EMRCREATEPEN structure contains members for the CreatePen enhanced metafile record. // EMRELLIPSE - The EMRELLIPSE and EMRRECTANGLE structures contain members for the Ellipse and Rectangle enhanced metafile records. // EMREOF - The EMREOF structure contains data for the enhanced metafile record that indicates the end of the metafile. // EMREXCLUDECLIPRECT - The EMREXCLUDECLIPRECT and EMRINTERSECTCLIPRECT structures contain members for the ExcludeClipRect and IntersectClipRect enhanced metafile records. // EMREXTCREATEFONTINDIRECTW - The EMREXTCREATEFONTINDIRECTW structure contains members for the CreateFontIndirect enhanced metafile record. // EMREXTCREATEPEN - The EMREXTCREATEPEN structure contains members for the ExtCreatePen enhanced metafile record. If the record contains a BITMAPINFO structure, it is followed by the bitmap bits that form a packed device-independent bitmap (DIB). // EMREXTFLOODFILL - The EMREXTFLOODFILL structure contains members for the ExtFloodFill enhanced metafile record. // EMREXTSELECTCLIPRGN - The EMREXTSELECTCLIPRGN structure contains members for the ExtSelectClipRgn enhanced metafile record. // EMREXTTEXTOUTA - The EMREXTTEXTOUTA and EMREXTTEXTOUTW structures contain members for the ExtTextOut, TextOut, or DrawText enhanced metafile records. // EMRFILLPATH - The EMRFILLPATH,�EMRSTROKEANDFILLPATH,� and EMRSTROKEPATH structures contain members for the FillPath, StrokeAndFillPath, and StrokePath enhanced metafile records. // EMRFILLRGN - The EMRFILLRGN structure contains members for the FillRgn enhanced metafile record. // EMRFORMAT - The EMRFORMAT structure contains information that identifies graphics data in an enhanced metafile. A GDICOMMENT_MULTIFORMATS enhanced metafile public comment contains an array of EMRFORMAT structures. // EMRFRAMERGN - The EMRFRAMERGN structure contains members for the FrameRgn enhanced metafile record. // EMRGDICOMMENT - The EMRGDICOMMENT structure contains application-specific data. // EMRGLSBOUNDEDRECORD - The EMRGLSBOUNDEDRECORD structure contains members for an enhanced metafile record generated by OpenGL functions. It contains data for OpenGL functions with information in pixel units that must be scaled when playing the metafile. // EMRGLSRECORD - The EMRGLSRECORD structure contains members for an enhanced metafile record generated by OpenGL functions. It contains data for OpenGL functions that scale automatically to the OpenGL viewport. // EMRGRADIENTFILL - The EMRGRADIENTFILL structure contains members for the GradientFill enhanced metafile record. // EMRINVERTRGN - The EMRINVERTRGN and EMRPAINTRGN structures contain members for the InvertRgn and PaintRgn enhanced metafile records. // EMRLINETO - The EMRLINETO and EMRMOVETOEX structures contains members for the LineTo and MoveToEx enhanced metafile records. // EMRMASKBLT - The EMRMASKBLT structure contains members for the MaskBlt enhanced metafile record. Note that graphics device interface (GDI) converts the device-dependent bitmap into a device-independent bitmap (DIB) before storing it in the metafile record. // EMRMODIFYWORLDTRANSFORM - The EMRMODIFYWORLDTRANSFORM structure contains members for the ModifyWorldTransform enhanced metafile record. // EMROFFSETCLIPRGN - The EMROFFSETCLIPRGN structure contains members for the OffsetClipRgn enhanced metafile record. // EMRPIXELFORMAT - The EMRPIXELFORMAT structure contains the members for the SetPixelFormat enhanced metafile record. The pixel format information in ENHMETAHEADER refers to this structure. // EMRPLGBLT - The EMRPLGBLT structure contains members for the PlgBlt enhanced metafile record. Note that graphics device interface (GDI) converts the device-dependent bitmap into a device-independent bitmap (DIB) before storing it in the metafile record. // EMRPOLYDRAW - The EMRPOLYDRAW structure contains members for the PolyDraw enhanced metafile record. // EMRPOLYDRAW16 - The EMRPOLYDRAW16 structure contains members for the PolyDraw enhanced metafile record. // EMRPOLYLINE - The EMRPOLYLINE, EMRPOLYBEZIER, EMRPOLYGON, EMRPOLYBEZIERTO, and EMRPOLYLINETO structures contain members for the Polyline, PolyBezier, Polygon, PolyBezierTo, and PolylineTo enhanced metafile records. // EMRPOLYLINE16 - The EMRPOLYLINE16, EMRPOLYBEZIER16, EMRPOLYGON16, EMRPOLYBEZIERTO16, and EMRPOLYLINETO16 structures contain members for the Polyline, PolyBezier, Polygon, PolyBezierTo, and PolylineTo enhanced metafile records. // EMRPOLYPOLYLINE - The EMRPOLYPOLYLINE and EMRPOLYPOLYGON structures contain members for the PolyPolyline and PolyPolygon enhanced metafile records. // EMRPOLYPOLYLINE16 - The EMRPOLYPOLYLINE16 and EMRPOLYPOLYGON16 structures contain members for the PolyPolyline and PolyPolygon enhanced metafile records. // EMRPOLYTEXTOUTA - The EMRPOLYTEXTOUTA and EMRPOLYTEXTOUTW structures contain members for the PolyTextOut enhanced metafile record. // EMRRESIZEPALETTE - The EMRRESIZEPALETTE structure contains members for the ResizePalette enhanced metafile record. // EMRRESTOREDC - The EMRRESTOREDC structure contains members for the RestoreDC enhanced metafile record. // EMRROUNDRECT - The EMRROUNDRECT structure contains members for the RoundRect enhanced metafile record. // EMRSCALEVIEWPORTEXTEX - The EMRSCALEVIEWPORTEXTEX and EMRSCALEWINDOWEXTEX structures contain members for the ScaleViewportExtEx and ScaleWindowExtEx enhanced metafile records. // EMRSELECTCLIPPATH - Contains parameters for the SelectClipPath, SetBkMode, SetMapMode, SetPolyFillMode, SetROP2, SetStretchBltMode, SetTextAlign, SetICMMode , and SetLayout enhanced metafile records. // EMRSELECTOBJECT - The EMRSELECTOBJECT and EMRDELETEOBJECT structures contain members for the SelectObject and DeleteObject enhanced metafile records. // EMRSELECTPALETTE - The EMRSELECTPALETTE structure contains members for the SelectPalette enhanced metafile record. Note that the bForceBackground parameter in SelectPalette is always recorded as TRUE, which causes the palette to be realized as a background palette. // EMRSETARCDIRECTION - The EMRSETARCDIRECTION structure contains members for the SetArcDirection enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETBKCOLOR - The EMRSETBKCOLOR and EMRSETTEXTCOLOR structures contain members for the SetBkColor and SetTextColor enhanced metafile records. // EMRSETCOLORADJUSTMENT - The EMRSETCOLORADJUSTMENT structure contains members for the SetColorAdjustment enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETCOLORSPACE - The EMRSETCOLORSPACE, EMRSELECTCOLORSPACE, and EMRDELETECOLORSPACE structures contain members for the SetColorSpace and DeleteColorSpace enhanced metafile records. // EMRSETDIBITSTODEVICE - The EMRSETDIBITSTODEVICE structure contains members for the SetDIBitsToDevice enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETICMPROFILE - The EMRSETICMPROFILE structure contains members for the SetICMProfile enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETMAPPERFLAGS - The EMRSETMAPPERFLAGS structure contains members for the SetMapperFlags enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETMITERLIMIT - The EMRSETMITERLIMIT structure contains members for the SetMiterLimit enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETPALETTEENTRIES - The EMRSETPALETTEENTRIES structure contains members for the SetPaletteEntries enhanced metafile record. // EMRSETPIXELV - The EMRSETPIXELV structure contains members for the SetPixelV enhanced metafile record. When an enhanced metafile is created, calls to SetPixel are also recorded in this record. // EMRSETVIEWPORTEXTEX - The EMRSETVIEWPORTEXTEX and EMRSETWINDOWEXTEX structures contains members for the SetViewportExtEx and SetWindowExtEx enhanced metafile records. // EMRSETVIEWPORTORGEX - The EMRSETVIEWPORTORGEX, EMRSETWINDOWORGEX, and EMRSETBRUSHORGEX structures contain members for the SetViewportOrgEx, SetWindowOrgEx, and SetBrushOrgEx enhanced metafile records. // EMRSETWORLDTRANSFORM - The EMRSETWORLDTRANSFORM structure contains members for the SetWorldTransform enhanced metafile record. // EMRSTRETCHBLT - The EMRSTRETCHBLT structure contains members for the StretchBlt enhanced metafile record. Note that graphics device interface (GDI) converts the device-dependent bitmap into a device-independent bitmap (DIB) before storing it in the metafile record. // EMRSTRETCHDIBITS - The EMRSTRETCHDIBITS structure contains members for the StretchDIBits enhanced metafile record. // EMRTEXT - The EMRTEXT structure contains members for text output. // EMRTRANSPARENTBLT - The EMRTRANSPARENTBLT structure contains members for the TransparentBLT enhanced metafile record. // ENHMETAHEADER - The ENHMETAHEADER structure contains enhanced-metafile data such as the dimensions of the picture stored in the enhanced metafile, the count of records in the enhanced metafile, the resolution of the device on which the picture was created, and so on.This structure is always the first record in an enhanced metafile. // ENHMETARECORD - The ENHMETARECORD structure contains data that describes a graphics device interface (GDI) function used to create part of a picture in an enhanced-format metafile. // ENUMLOGFONTA - The ENUMLOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font, the complete name of a font, and the style of a font. (ANSI) // ENUMLOGFONTEXA - The ENUMLOGFONTEX structure contains information about an enumerated font. (ANSI) // ENUMLOGFONTEXDVA - The ENUMLOGFONTEXDV structure contains the information used to create a font. (ANSI) // ENUMLOGFONTEXDVW - The ENUMLOGFONTEXDV structure contains the information used to create a font. (Unicode) // ENUMLOGFONTEXW - The ENUMLOGFONTEX structure contains information about an enumerated font. (Unicode) // ENUMLOGFONTW - The ENUMLOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font, the complete name of a font, and the style of a font. (Unicode) // ENUMTEXTMETRICA - The ENUMTEXTMETRIC structure contains information about a physical font. (ANSI) // ENUMTEXTMETRICW - The ENUMTEXTMETRIC structure contains information about a physical font. (Unicode) // EXTLOGFONTA - The EXTLOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font. (ANSI) // EXTLOGFONTW - The EXTLOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font. (Unicode) // EXTLOGPEN - The EXTLOGPEN structure defines the pen style, width, and brush attributes for an extended pen. // FIXED - The FIXED structure contains the integral and fractional parts of a fixed-point real number. // GCP_RESULTSA - The GCP_RESULTS structure contains information about characters in a string. This structure receives the results of the GetCharacterPlacement function. For some languages, the first element in the arrays may contain more, language-dependent information. (ANSI) // GCP_RESULTSW - The GCP_RESULTS structure contains information about characters in a string. This structure receives the results of the GetCharacterPlacement function. For some languages, the first element in the arrays may contain more, language-dependent information. (Unicode) // GLYPHMETRICS - The GLYPHMETRICS structure contains information about the placement and orientation of a glyph in a character cell. // GLYPHSET - The GLYPHSET structure contains information about a range of Unicode code points. // GRADIENT_RECT - The GRADIENT_RECT structure specifies the index of two vertices in the pVertex array in the GradientFill function. These two vertices form the upper-left and lower-right boundaries of a rectangle. // GRADIENT_TRIANGLE - The GRADIENT_TRIANGLE structure specifies the index of three vertices in the pVertex array in the GradientFill function. These three vertices form one triangle. // HANDLETABLE - The HANDLETABLE structure is an array of handles, each of which identifies a graphics device interface (GDI) object. // KERNINGPAIR - The KERNINGPAIR structure defines a kerning pair. // LOGBRUSH - The LOGBRUSH structure defines the style, color, and pattern of a physical brush. It is used by the CreateBrushIndirect and ExtCreatePen functions. // LOGBRUSH32 - The LOGBRUSH32 structure defines the style, color, and pattern of a physical brush. // LOGFONTA - The LOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font. (ANSI) // LOGFONTW - The LOGFONT structure defines the attributes of a font. (Unicode) // LOGPALETTE - The LOGPALETTE structure defines a logical palette. // LOGPEN - The LOGPEN structure defines the style, width, and color of a pen. The CreatePenIndirect function uses the LOGPEN structure. // MAT2 - The MAT2 structure contains the values for a transformation matrix used by the GetGlyphOutline function. // METAHEADER - The METAHEADER structure contains information about a Windows-format metafile. // METARECORD - The METARECORD structure contains a Windows-format metafile record. // MONITORINFO - The MONITORINFO structure contains information about a display monitor.The GetMonitorInfo function stores information in a MONITORINFO structure or a MONITORINFOEX structure.The MONITORINFO structure is a subset of the MONITORINFOEX structure. // MONITORINFOEXA - The MONITORINFOEX structure contains information about a display monitor.The GetMonitorInfo function stores information into a MONITORINFOEX structure or a MONITORINFO structure.The MONITORINFOEX structure is a superset of the MONITORINFO structure. (ANSI) // MONITORINFOEXW - The MONITORINFOEX structure contains information about a display monitor.The GetMonitorInfo function stores information into a MONITORINFOEX structure or a MONITORINFO structure.The MONITORINFOEX structure is a superset of the MONITORINFO structure. (Unicode) // NEWTEXTMETRICA - The NEWTEXTMETRIC structure contains data that describes a physical font. (ANSI) // NEWTEXTMETRICEXA - The NEWTEXTMETRICEX structure contains information about a physical font. (ANSI) // NEWTEXTMETRICEXW - The NEWTEXTMETRICEX structure contains information about a physical font. (Unicode) // NEWTEXTMETRICW - The NEWTEXTMETRIC structure contains data that describes a physical font. (Unicode) // OUTLINETEXTMETRICA - The OUTLINETEXTMETRIC structure contains metrics describing a TrueType font. (ANSI) // OUTLINETEXTMETRICW - The OUTLINETEXTMETRIC structure contains metrics describing a TrueType font. (Unicode) // PAINTSTRUCT - The PAINTSTRUCT structure contains information for an application. This information can be used to paint the client area of a window owned by that application. // PANOSE - The PANOSE structure describes the PANOSE font-classification values for a TrueType font. These characteristics are then used to associate the font with other fonts of similar appearance but different names. // POINTFX - The POINTFX structure contains the coordinates of points that describe the outline of a character in a TrueType font. // POLYTEXTA - The POLYTEXT structure describes how the PolyTextOut function should draw a string of text. (ANSI) // POLYTEXTW - The POLYTEXT structure describes how the PolyTextOut function should draw a string of text. (Unicode) // RASTERIZER_STATUS - The RASTERIZER_STATUS structure contains information about whether TrueType is installed. This structure is filled when an application calls the GetRasterizerCaps function. // RGBQUAD - The RGBQUAD structure describes a color consisting of relative intensities of red, green, and blue. // RGBTRIPLE - The RGBTRIPLE structure describes a color consisting of relative intensities of red, green, and blue. The bmciColors member of the BITMAPCOREINFO structure consists of an array of RGBTRIPLE structures. // RGNDATA - The RGNDATA structure contains a header and an array of rectangles that compose a region. The rectangles are sorted top to bottom, left to right. They do not overlap. // RGNDATAHEADER - The RGNDATAHEADER structure describes the data returned by the GetRegionData function. // TEXTMETRICA - The TEXTMETRIC structure contains basic information about a physical font. All sizes are specified in logical units; that is, they depend on the current mapping mode of the display context. (ANSI) // TEXTMETRICW - The TEXTMETRIC structure contains basic information about a physical font. All sizes are specified in logical units; that is, they depend on the current mapping mode of the display context. (Unicode) // TRIVERTEX - The TRIVERTEX structure contains color information and position information. // TTEMBEDINFO - The TTEMBEDINFO structure contains a list of URLs from which the embedded font object may be legitimately referenced. // TTLOADINFO - The TTLOADINFO structure contains the URL from which the embedded font object has been obtained. // TTPOLYCURVE - The TTPOLYCURVE structure contains information about a curve in the outline of a TrueType character. // TTPOLYGONHEADER - The TTPOLYGONHEADER structure specifies the starting position and type of a contour in a TrueType character outline. // TTVALIDATIONTESTSPARAMS - The TTVALIDATIONTESTSPARAMS structure contains parameters for testing a Microsoft OpenType font. // TTVALIDATIONTESTSPARAMSEX - The TTVALIDATIONTESTSPARAMSEX structure contains parameters for testing a Microsoft OpenType font. // WCRANGE - The WCRANGE structure specifies a range of Unicode characters. // XFORM - The XFORM structure specifies a world-space to page-space transformation. // // LITERATURE_SOURCES // * PHP_NET (2024-04-18) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_gdi/ // WINDOWS_GDI - END // // LITERATURE_SOURCES // * PHP_NET (2024-04-18) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/ // OVERVIEW - END // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_ENABLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Enables or disables a button. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) { // ========== BUTTON_ENABLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Enables or disables a button. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_Enable( // hwndCtl, // fEnable // ); // ===== CODE Button_Enable( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. fEnable // BOOL fEnable - TRUE to enable the button, or FALSE to disable it. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_enable // ========== BUTTON_ENABLE - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_Enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_ENABLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETCHECK // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETCHECK message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_GetCheck() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_getcheck(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== BUTTON_GETCHECK - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETCHECK message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_GetCheck( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Button_GetCheck( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // If the button has a style other than those listed, the return value is zero. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_getcheck // ========== BUTTON_GETCHECK - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_GetCheck(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETCHECK // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETSTATE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the state of a button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETSTATE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_GetState() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_getstate(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== BUTTON_GETSTATE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the state of a button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_GETSTATE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_GetState( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Button_GetState( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_getstate // ========== BUTTON_GETSTATE - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_GetState(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETSTATE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the text of a button. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) { // ========== BUTTON_GETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the text of a button. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_GetText( // hwndCtl, // lpch, // cchMax // ); // ===== CODE Button_GetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. lpch, // LPTSTR lpch - Pointer to the buffer that will receive the text. cchMax // int cchMax - The maximum number of characters to copy to the buffer, including the NULL terminator. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_gettext // ========== BUTTON_GETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_GetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of a button. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== BUTTON_GETTEXTLENGTH - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of a button. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_GetTextLength( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Button_GetTextLength( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowTextLength. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_gettextlength // ========== BUTTON_GETTEXTLENGTH - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_GetTextLength(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETCHECK // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETCHECK message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_SetCheck() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_setcheck(HWND hwndCtl, int check) { // ========== BUTTON_SETCHECK - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the check state of a radio button or check box. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETCHECK message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_SetCheck( // hwndCtl, // check // ); // ===== CODE Button_SetCheck( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. check // int check - The check state. This parameter can be one of the following values. // // Value - Meaning // BST_CHECKED - Sets the button state to checked. // BST_INDETERMINATE - Sets the button state to grayed, indicating an indeterminate state. Use this value only if the button has the BS_3STATE or BS_AUTO3STATE style. // BST_UNCHECKED - Sets the button state to cleared. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro has no effect on push buttons. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_setcheck // ========== BUTTON_SETCHECK - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_SetCheck(HWND hwndCtl, int check) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETCHECK // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETSTATE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the highlight state of a button. The highlight state indicates whether the button is highlighted as if the user had pushed it. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTATE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_SetState() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_setstate(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL state) { // ========== BUTTON_SETSTATE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the highlight state of a button. The highlight state indicates whether the button is highlighted as if the user had pushed it. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTATE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_SetState( // hwndCtl, // state // ); // ===== CODE Button_SetState( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. state // BOOL state - TRUE to highlight the button; otherwise FALSE. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // Highlighting affects only the appearance of a button. It has no effect on the check state of a radio button or check box. // A button is automatically highlighted when the user positions the cursor over it and presses and holds the left mouse button. The highlighting is removed when the user releases the mouse button. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_setstate // ========== BUTTON_SETSTATE - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_SetState(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL state) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETSTATE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETSTYLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the style of a button. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTYLE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_SetStyle() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_setstyle(HWND hwndCtl, DWORD style, BOOL fRedraw) { // ========== BUTTON_SETSTYLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the style of a button. You can use this macro or send the BM_SETSTYLE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_SetStyle( // hwndCtl, // style, // fRedraw // ); // ===== CODE Button_SetStyle( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. style, // DWORD style - The button style. This parameter can be a combination of button styles. For a table of button styles, see Button Styles. fRedraw // BOOL fRedraw - TRUE to redraw the button; otherwise FALSE. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_setstyle // ========== BUTTON_SETSTYLE - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_SetStyle(HWND hwndCtl, DWORD style, BOOL fRedraw) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETSTYLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the text of a button. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Button_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_button_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) { // ========== BUTTON_SETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the text of a button. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Button_SetText( // hwndCtl, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE Button_SetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the button control. lpsz // LPTSTR lpsz - A pointer to a null-terminated string to be used as the button text. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to SetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-button_settext // ========== BUTTON_SETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Button_SetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_BUTTON_SETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ADDITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds item data to the list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_AddItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_additemdata(HWND hwndCtl, LPARAM data) { // ========== COMBOBOX_ADDITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds item data to the list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_AddItemData( // hwndCtl, // data // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_AddItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. data // LPARAM data - A pointer to the item data to add. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // Use this macro for a list in a combo box with an owner-drawn style but without the CBS_HASSTRINGS style. For more information, see CB_ADDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_additemdata // ========== COMBOBOX_ADDITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_AddItemData(HWND hwndCtl, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ADDITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ADDSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list in a combo box. If the combo box does not have the CBS_SORT style, the string is added to the end of the list. Otherwise, the string is inserted into the list and the list is sorted. You can use this macro or send the CB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_AddString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_addstring(HWND hwndCtl, LPCTSTR lpsz) { // ========== COMBOBOX_ADDSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list in a combo box. If the combo box does not have the CBS_SORT style, the string is added to the end of the list. Otherwise, the string is inserted into the list and the list is sorted. You can use this macro or send the CB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_AddString( // hwndCtl, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_AddString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpsz // LPCTSTR lpsz - The string to add. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_ADDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_addstring // ========== COMBOBOX_ADDSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_AddString(HWND hwndCtl, LPCTSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ADDSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_DELETESTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Deletes the item at the specified location in a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_DeleteString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_deletestring(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== COMBOBOX_DELETESTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Deletes the item at the specified location in a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_DeleteString( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_DeleteString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item to delete. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_DELETESTRING // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_deletestring // ========== COMBOBOX_DELETESTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_DeleteString(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_DELETESTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_DIR // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds names to the list displayed by a combo box. The macro adds the names of directories and files that match a specified string and set of file attributes. It can also add mapped drive letters to the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_DIR message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_Dir() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_dir(HWND hwndCtl, UINT attrs, LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec) { // ========== COMBOBOX_DIR - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds names to the list displayed by a combo box. The macro adds the names of directories and files that match a specified string and set of file attributes. It can also add mapped drive letters to the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_DIR message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_Dir( // hwndCtl, // attrs, // lpszFileSpec // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_Dir( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. attrs, // UINT attrs - The attributes of the files or directories to be added to the list in a combo box. For more information, see CB_DIR. lpszFileSpec // LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec - A pointer to the null-terminated string that specifies an absolute path, relative path, or filename. An absolute path can begin with a drive letter (for example, d:) or a UNC name (for example, \ machinename\ sharename). ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_DIR. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_dir // ========== COMBOBOX_DIR - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_Dir(HWND hwndCtl, UINT attrs, LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_DIR // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ENABLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Enables or disables a combo box control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) { // ========== COMBOBOX_ENABLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Enables or disables a combo box control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // void ComboBox_Enable( // hwndCtl, // fEnable // ); // ===== SYNTAX // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== CODE ComboBox_Enable( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fEnable // BOOL fEnable - TRUE to enable the control, or FALSE to disable it. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_enable // ========== COMBOBOX_ENABLE - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_Enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_ENABLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Finds the first item in a combo box list that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_FindItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_finditemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) { // ========== COMBOBOX_FINDITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Finds the first item in a combo box list that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_FindItemData( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // data // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_FindItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list, it continues searching from the top of the list back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list is searched from the beginning. data // LPARAM data - The data to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_FINDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_finditemdata // ========== COMBOBOX_FINDITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_FindItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Finds the first string in a combo box list that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_FindString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_findstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) { // ========== COMBOBOX_FINDSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Finds the first string in a combo box list that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_FindString( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // lpszFind // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_FindString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list, it continues searching from the top of the list back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list is searched from the beginning. lpszFind // LPCTSTR lpszFind - The string to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_FINDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_findstring // ========== COMBOBOX_FINDSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_FindString(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Finds the first string in a combo box list that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_FindStringExact() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_findstringexact(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) { // ========== COMBOBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Finds the first string in a combo box list that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_FindStringExact( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // lpszFind // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_FindStringExact( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list, it continues searching from the top of the list back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list is searched from the beginning. lpszFind // LPCTSTR lpszFind - The string to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_FINDSTRINGEXACT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_findstringexact // ========== COMBOBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_FindStringExact(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETCOUNT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of items in the list box of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getcount(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETCOUNT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of items in the list box of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetCount( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetCount( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getcount // ========== COMBOBOX_GETCOUNT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetCount(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETCOUNT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETCURSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the index of the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getcursel(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETCURSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the index of the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetCurSel( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetCurSel( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getcursel // ========== COMBOBOX_GETCURSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetCurSel(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETCURSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the screen coordinates of a combo box in its dropped-down state. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getdroppedcontrolrect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the screen coordinates of a combo box in its dropped-down state. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect( // hwndCtl, // lprc // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lprc // RECT* lprc - A pointer to a RECT structure that receives the coordinates of the combo box in its dropped-down state. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getdroppedcontrolrect // ========== COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetDroppedControlRect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDCONTROLRECT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDSTATE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Ascertains whether the drop list in a combo box control is visible. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDSTATE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetDroppedState() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getdroppedstate(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDSTATE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Ascertains whether the drop list in a combo box control is visible. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETDROPPEDSTATE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetDroppedState( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetDroppedState( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the combo box control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getdroppedstate // ========== COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDSTATE - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetDroppedState(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETDROPPEDSTATE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETEXTENDEDUI // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Ascertains whether a combo box is using the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetExtendedUI() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getextendedui(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETEXTENDEDUI - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Ascertains whether a combo box is using the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetExtendedUI( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetExtendedUI( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_GETEXTENDEDUI. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getextendedui // ========== COMBOBOX_GETEXTENDEDUI - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetExtendedUI(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETEXTENDEDUI // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetItemData( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getitemdata // ========== COMBOBOX_GETITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the height of list items in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getitemheight(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the height of list items in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetItemHeight( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetItemHeight( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // This macro passes zero as the wParam member of SendMessage. For more information, see CB_GETITEMHEIGHT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getitemheight // ========== COMBOBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetItemHeight(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets a string from a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetLBText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getlbtext(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCTSTR lpszBuffer) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets a string from a list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetLBText( // hwndCtl, // index, // lpszBuffer // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetLBText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index of the item. lpszBuffer // LPCTSTR lpszBuffer - A pointer to the buffer that will receive the string. The buffer must have sufficient space for the string and a terminating null character. Before allocating the buffer, you can call ComboBox_GetLBTextLen to retrieve the length of the string. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_GETLBTEXT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getlbtext // ========== COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetLBText(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCTSTR lpszBuffer) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXTLEN // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the length of a string in the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetLBTextLen() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_getlbtextlen(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXTLEN - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the length of a string in the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_GETLBTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetLBTextLen( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetLBTextLen( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_GETLBTEXTLEN. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_getlbtextlen // ========== COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXTLEN - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetLBTextLen(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETLBTEXTLEN // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the text from a combo box control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the text from a combo box control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetText( // hwndCtl, // lpch, // cchMax // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpch, // LPTSTR lpch - A pointer to the buffer that will receive the text. cchMax // int cchMax - The maximum number of characters to copy to the buffer, including the NULL terminator. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_gettext // ========== COMBOBOX_GETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of a combo box. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_GETTEXTLENGTH - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of a combo box. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_GetTextLength( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_GetTextLength( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowTextLength. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_gettextlength // ========== COMBOBOX_GETTEXTLENGTH - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_GetTextLength(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_INSERTITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Inserts item data in a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_InsertItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_insertitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) { // ========== COMBOBOX_INSERTITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Inserts item data in a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_InsertItemData( // hwndCtl, // index, // data // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_InsertItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index in the list at which to insert the item data, or –1 to add it to the end of the list. data // LPARAM data - The item data to insert. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // Use this macro for a list in a combo box with an owner-drawn style but without the CBS_HASSTRINGS style. For more information, see CB_INSERTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_insertitemdata // ========== COMBOBOX_INSERTITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_InsertItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_INSERTITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_INSERTSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_InsertString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_insertstring(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCSTR lpsz) { // ========== COMBOBOX_INSERTSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list in a combo box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the CB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_InsertString( // hwndCtl, // index, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_InsertString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index at which to insert the string, or –1 to add it to the end of the list. lpsz // LPCSTR lpsz - The string to add. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_INSERTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_insertstring // ========== COMBOBOX_INSERTSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_InsertString(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_INSERTSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_LIMITTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Limits the length of the text the user may type into the edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_LimitText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_limittext(HWND hwndCtl, int cchLimit) { // ========== COMBOBOX_LIMITTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Limits the length of the text the user may type into the edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_LimitText( // hwndCtl, // cchLimit // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_LimitText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cchLimit // int cchLimit - The maximum number of characters. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_LIMITTEXT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_limittext // ========== COMBOBOX_LIMITTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_LimitText(HWND hwndCtl, int cchLimit) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_LIMITTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_RESETCONTENT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Removes all items from the list box and edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_ResetContent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_resetcontent(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== COMBOBOX_RESETCONTENT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Removes all items from the list box and edit control of a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_ResetContent( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_ResetContent( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_resetcontent // ========== COMBOBOX_RESETCONTENT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_ResetContent(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_RESETCONTENT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SELECTITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Searches a list in a combo box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SelectItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_selectitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SELECTITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Searches a list in a combo box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SelectItemData( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // data // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SelectItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list, it continues searching from the top of the list back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list is searched from the beginning. data // LPARAM data - The item data to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_SELECTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_selectitemdata // ========== COMBOBOX_SELECTITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SelectItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SELECTITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SELECTSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Searches a list in a combo box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SelectString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_selectstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszSelect) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SELECTSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Searches a list in a combo box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the CB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SelectString( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // lpszSelect // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SelectString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list, it continues searching from the top of the list back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list is searched from the beginning. lpszSelect // LPCTSTR lpszSelect - The string to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_SELECTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_selectstring // ========== COMBOBOX_SELECTSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SelectString(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszSelect) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SELECTSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETCURSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setcursel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SETCURSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the currently selected item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SetCurSel( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SetCurSel( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item to select, or –1 to clear the selection. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_setcursel // ========== COMBOBOX_SETCURSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SetCurSel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETCURSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETEXTENDEDUI // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Selects either the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI for a combo box that has the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SetExtendedUI() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setextendedui(HWND hwndCtl, UINT flags) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SETEXTENDEDUI - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Selects either the default user interface (UI) or the extended UI for a combo box that has the CBS_DROPDOWN or CBS_DROPDOWNLIST style. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETEXTENDEDUI message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SetExtendedUI( // hwndCtl, // flags // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SetExtendedUI( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. flags // UINT flags - Zero to use the default UI, or nonzero to use the extended UI. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_SETEXTENDEDUI. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_setextendedui // ========== COMBOBOX_SETEXTENDEDUI - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SetExtendedUI(HWND hwndCtl, UINT flags) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETEXTENDEDUI // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SETITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list item in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SetItemData( // hwndCtl, // index, // data // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SetItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index of the item. data // LPARAM data - The item data to set. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_SETITEMDATA. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-20) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_setitemdata // ========== COMBOBOX_SETITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SetItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the height of list items or the selection field in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_setitemheight(HWND hwndCtl, int index, int cyItem) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the height of list items or the selection field in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SetItemHeight( // hwndCtl, // index, // cyItem // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SetItemHeight( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The component of the combo box for which to set the height. This parameter must be –1 to set the height of the selection field. It must be zero to set the height of list items, unless the combo box has the CBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style. In that case, the index parameter is the zero-based index of a specific list item. cyItem // int cyItem - The height in pixels. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see CB_SETITEMHEIGHT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_setitemheight // ========== COMBOBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SetItemHeight(HWND hwndCtl, int index, int cyItem) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the text of a combo box. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the text of a combo box. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_SetText( // hwndCtl, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_SetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpsz // LPTSTR lpsz - A pointer to a null-terminated string to be used as the control text. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to SetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_settext // ========== COMBOBOX_SETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_SetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SHOWDROPDOWN // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Shows or hides the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SHOWDROPDOWN message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ComboBox_ShowDropdown() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_combobox_showdropdown(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fShow) { // ========== COMBOBOX_SHOWDROPDOWN - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Shows or hides the list in a combo box. You can use this macro or send the CB_SHOWDROPDOWN message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ComboBox_ShowDropdown( // hwndCtl, // fShow // ); // ===== CODE ComboBox_ShowDropdown( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fShow // BOOL fShow - TRUE to show the dropdown, or FALSE to hide it. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // This macro has no effect on a combo box created with the CBS_SIMPLE style. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-combobox_showdropdown // ========== COMBOBOX_SHOWDROPDOWN - END // SYNTAX: // void ComboBox_ShowDropdown(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fShow) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_COMBOBOX_SHOWDROPDOWN // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_DELETEFONT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // The DeleteFont macro deletes a font object, freeing all system resources associated with the font object. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // DeleteFont() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_deletefont(HFONT hfont) { // ========== DELETEFONT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // The DeleteFont macro deletes a font object, freeing all system resources associated with the font object. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows_2000_Professional [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows_2000_Server [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void DeleteFont( // hfont // ); // ===== CODE DeleteFont( hfont // HFONT hfont - A handle to the font object. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // After the font object is deleted, the specified handle is no longer valid. // The DeleteFont macro is equivalent to calling DeleteObject as follows: // [syntax] // DeleteObject((HGDIOBJ)(HFONT)(hfont)) // [/syntax] // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-deletefont // ========== DELETEFONT - END // SYNTAX: // void DeleteFont(HFONT hfont) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_DELETEFONT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_CANUNDO // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Determines whether there are any actions in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_CANUNDO message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_CanUndo() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_canundo(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_CANUNDO - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Determines whether there are any actions in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_CANUNDO message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_CanUndo( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_CanUndo( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_CANUNDO. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_canundo // ========== EDIT_CANUNDO - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_CanUndo(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_CANUNDO // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Resets the undo flag of an edit or rich edit control. The undo flag is set whenever an operation within the edit control can be undone. You can use this macro or send the EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_emptyundobuffer(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Resets the undo flag of an edit or rich edit control. The undo flag is set whenever an operation within the edit control can be undone. You can use this macro or send the EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_emptyundobuffer // ========== EDIT_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_EmptyUndoBuffer(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_EMPTYUNDOBUFFER // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_ENABLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Enables or disables an edit control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) { // ========== EDIT_ENABLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Enables or disables an edit control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_Enable( // hwndCtl, // fEnable // ); // ===== CODE Edit_Enable( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the edit control. fEnable // BOOL fEnable - TRUE to enable the control, or FALSE to disable it. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_enable // ========== EDIT_ENABLE - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_Enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_ENABLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_FMTLINES // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets a flag that determines whether text retrieved from a multiline edit control includes soft line-break characters. A soft line break consists of two carriage returns and a line feed and is inserted at the end of a line that is broken because of word wrapping. You can use this macro or send the EM_FMTLINES message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_FmtLines() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_fmtlines(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fAddEOL) { // ========== EDIT_FMTLINES - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets a flag that determines whether text retrieved from a multiline edit control includes soft line-break characters. A soft line break consists of two carriage returns and a line feed and is inserted at the end of a line that is broken because of word wrapping. You can use this macro or send the EM_FMTLINES message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_FmtLines( // hwndCtl, // fAddEOL // ); // ===== CODE Edit_FmtLines( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fAddEOL // BOOL fAddEOL - TRUE to insert line breaks; otherwise FALSE. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_FMTLINES. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_fmtlines // ========== EDIT_FMTLINES - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_FmtLines(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fAddEOL) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_FMTLINES // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the index of the uppermost visible line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getfirstvisibleline(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the index of the uppermost visible line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getfirstvisibleline // ========== EDIT_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetFirstVisibleLine(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETFIRSTVISIBLELINE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETHANDLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets a handle to the memory currently allocated for the text of a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETHANDLE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetHandle() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_gethandle(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETHANDLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets a handle to the memory currently allocated for the text of a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETHANDLE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetHandle( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetHandle( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETHANDLE. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_gethandle // ========== EDIT_GETHANDLE - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetHandle(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETHANDLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETLINE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves a line of text from an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetLine() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getline(HWND hwndCtl, int line, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) { // ========== EDIT_GETLINE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves a line of text from an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetLine( // hwndCtl, // line, // lpch, // cchMax // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetLine( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. line, // int line - The zero-based index of the line. This parameter is ignored by a single-line edit control. lpch, // LPTSTR lpch - A pointer to a buffer that receives the string. cchMax // int cchMax - The maximum number of characters to be copied to the buffer. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETLINE // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getline // ========== EDIT_GETLINE - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetLine(HWND hwndCtl, int line, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETLINE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETLINECOUNT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of lines in the text of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINECOUNT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetLineCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getlinecount(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETLINECOUNT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of lines in the text of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETLINECOUNT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetLineCount( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetLineCount( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETLINECOUNT // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getlinecount // ========== EDIT_GETLINECOUNT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetLineCount(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETLINECOUNT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETMODIFY // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the state of an edit or rich edit control's modification flag. The flag indicates whether the contents of the control have been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETMODIFY message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetModify() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getmodify(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETMODIFY - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the state of an edit or rich edit control's modification flag. The flag indicates whether the contents of the control have been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETMODIFY message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetModify( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetModify( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETMODIFY. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getmodify // ========== EDIT_GETMODIFY - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetModify(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETMODIFY // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETPASSWORDCHAR // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the password character for an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetPasswordChar() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getpasswordchar(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETPASSWORDCHAR - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the password character for an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetPasswordChar( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetPasswordChar( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETPASSWORDCHAR. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getpasswordchar // ========== EDIT_GETPASSWORDCHAR - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetPasswordChar(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETPASSWORDCHAR // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETRECT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETRECT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getrect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) { // ========== EDIT_GETRECT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETRECT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetRect( // hwndCtl, // lprc // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetRect( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lprc // RECT* lprc - A pointer to a RECT structure that receives the formatting rectangle. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETRECT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getrect // ========== EDIT_GETRECT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetRect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETRECT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the starting and ending character positions of the current selection in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getsel(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the starting and ending character positions of the current selection in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetSel( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetSel( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // This macro does not have the complete functionality of the EM_GETSEL message, because it does not receive the 32-bit return values in the parameters of SendMessage. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getsel // ========== EDIT_GETSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetSel(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the text of an edit control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) { // ========== EDIT_GETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the text of an edit control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetText( // hwndCtl, // lpch, // cchMax // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the edit control. lpch, // LPTSTR lpch - A pointer to the buffer that will receive the text. cchMax // int cchMax - The maximum number of characters to copy to the buffer, including the NULL terminator. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_gettext // ========== EDIT_GETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of an edit control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETTEXTLENGTH - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of an edit control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetTextLength( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetTextLength( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowTextLength. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_gettextlength // ========== EDIT_GETTEXTLENGTH - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetTextLength(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETWORDBREAKPROC // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the address of an edit or rich edit control's Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_GetWordBreakProc() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_getwordbreakproc(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_GETWORDBREAKPROC - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the address of an edit or rich edit control's Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_GetWordBreakProc( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_GetWordBreakProc( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_GETWORDBREAKPROC. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_getwordbreakproc // ========== EDIT_GETWORDBREAKPROC - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_GetWordBreakProc(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_GETWORDBREAKPROC // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LIMITTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Limits the length of text that can be entered into an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_LimitText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_limittext(HWND hwndCtl, int cchMax) { // ========== EDIT_LIMITTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Limits the length of text that can be entered into an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LIMITTEXT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_LimitText( // hwndCtl, // cchMax // ); // ===== CODE Edit_LimitText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cchMax // int cchMax - The maximum number of characters. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_LIMITTEXT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_limittext // ========== EDIT_LIMITTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_LimitText(HWND hwndCtl, int cchMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LIMITTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINEFROMCHAR // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the index of the line that contains the specified character index in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEFROMCHAR message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_LineFromChar() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_linefromchar(HWND hwndCtl, int ich) { // ========== EDIT_LINEFROMCHAR - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the index of the line that contains the specified character index in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEFROMCHAR message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_LineFromChar( // hwndCtl, // ich // ); // ===== CODE Edit_LineFromChar( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ich // int ich - The zero-based index of the character from the beginning of the text in the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_LINEFROMCHAR. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_linefromchar // ========== EDIT_LINEFROMCHAR - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_LineFromChar(HWND hwndCtl, int ich) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINEFROMCHAR // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINEINDEX // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the character index of the first character of a specified line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEINDEX message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_LineIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_lineindex(HWND hwndCtl, int line) { // ========== EDIT_LINEINDEX - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the character index of the first character of a specified line in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINEINDEX message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_LineIndex( // hwndCtl, // line // ); // ===== CODE Edit_LineIndex( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. line // int line - The zero-based line number. A value of –1 specifies the current line number (the line that contains the caret). ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_lineindex // ========== EDIT_LINEINDEX - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_LineIndex(HWND hwndCtl, int line) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINEINDEX // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINELENGTH // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the length, in characters, of a line in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINELENGTH message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_LineLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_linelength(HWND hwndCtl, int line) { // ========== EDIT_LINELENGTH - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the length, in characters, of a line in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_LINELENGTH message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_LineLength( // hwndCtl, // line // ); // ===== CODE Edit_LineLength( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. line // int line - The zero-based index of the line. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_LINELENGTH. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_linelength // ========== EDIT_LINELENGTH - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_LineLength(HWND hwndCtl, int line) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_LINELENGTH // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_REPLACESEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Replaces the selected text in an edit control or a rich edit control with the specified text. You can use this macro or send the EM_REPLACESEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_ReplaceSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_replacesel(HWND hwndCtl, LPCTSTR lpszReplace) { // ========== EDIT_REPLACESEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Replaces the selected text in an edit control or a rich edit control with the specified text. You can use this macro or send the EM_REPLACESEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_ReplaceSel( // hwndCtl, // lpszReplace // ); // ===== CODE Edit_ReplaceSel( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpszReplace // LPCTSTR lpszReplace - A pointer to a null-terminated string containing the replacement text. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_REPLACESEL. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_replacesel // ========== EDIT_REPLACESEL - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_ReplaceSel(HWND hwndCtl, LPCTSTR lpszReplace) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_REPLACESEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SCROLL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Scrolls the text vertically in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_Scroll() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_scroll(HWND hwndCtl, int dv, int dh) { // ========== EDIT_SCROLL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Scrolls the text vertically in a multiline edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_Scroll( // hwndCtl, // dv, // dh // ); // ===== CODE Edit_Scroll( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. dv, // int dv - The amount to scroll vertically. dh // int dh - The amount to scroll horizontally. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SCROLL. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_scroll // ========== EDIT_SCROLL - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_Scroll(HWND hwndCtl, int dv, int dh) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SCROLL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SCROLLCARET // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Scrolls the caret into view in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLLCARET message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_ScrollCaret() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_scrollcaret(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_SCROLLCARET - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Scrolls the caret into view in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SCROLLCARET message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_ScrollCaret( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_ScrollCaret( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_scrollcaret // ========== EDIT_SCROLLCARET - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_ScrollCaret(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SCROLLCARET // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETHANDLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the handle of the memory that will be used by a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETHANDLE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetHandle() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_sethandle(HWND hwndCtl, HLOCAL h) { // ========== EDIT_SETHANDLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the handle of the memory that will be used by a multiline edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETHANDLE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetHandle( // hwndCtl, // h // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetHandle( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. h // HLOCAL h - A handle to the memory buffer the edit control uses to store the currently displayed text instead of allocating its own memory. If necessary, the control reallocates this memory. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETHANDLE. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_sethandle // ========== EDIT_SETHANDLE - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetHandle(HWND hwndCtl, HLOCAL h) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETHANDLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETMODIFY // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets or clears the modification flag for an edit control. The modification flag indicates whether the text within the edit control has been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETMODIFY message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetModify() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setmodify(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fModified) { // ========== EDIT_SETMODIFY - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets or clears the modification flag for an edit control. The modification flag indicates whether the text within the edit control has been modified. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETMODIFY message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetModify( // hwndCtl, // fModified // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetModify( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fModified // BOOL fModified - TRUE if the text has been modified; otherwise FALSE. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETMODIFY. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setmodify // ========== EDIT_SETMODIFY - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetModify(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fModified) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETMODIFY // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETPASSWORDCHAR // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets or removes the password character for an edit or rich edit control. When a password character is set, that character is displayed in place of the characters typed by the user. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetPasswordChar() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setpasswordchar(HWND hwndCtl, UINT ch) { // ========== EDIT_SETPASSWORDCHAR - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets or removes the password character for an edit or rich edit control. When a password character is set, that character is displayed in place of the characters typed by the user. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetPasswordChar( // hwndCtl, // ch // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetPasswordChar( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ch // UINT ch - The character to be displayed in place of the characters typed by the user. If this parameter is zero, the control removes the current password character and displays the characters typed by the user. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETPASSWORDCHAR. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setpasswordchar // ========== EDIT_SETPASSWORDCHAR - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetPasswordChar(HWND hwndCtl, UINT ch) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETPASSWORDCHAR // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETREADONLY // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets or removes the read-only style (ES_READONLY) of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETREADONLY message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetReadOnly() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setreadonly(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fReadOnly) { // ========== EDIT_SETREADONLY - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets or removes the read-only style (ES_READONLY) of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETREADONLY message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetReadOnly( // hwndCtl, // fReadOnly // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetReadOnly( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fReadOnly // BOOL fReadOnly - TRUE to set the control to read-only; FALSE to remove the read-only style. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETREADONLY. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setreadonly // ========== EDIT_SETREADONLY - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetReadOnly(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fReadOnly) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETREADONLY // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETRECT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setrect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) { // ========== EDIT_SETRECT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the formatting rectangle of an edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetRect( // hwndCtl, // lprc // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetRect( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lprc // RECT* lprc - A pointer to a RECT structure that specifies the new dimensions of the rectangle. If this parameter is NULL, the formatting rectangle is set to its default values. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETRECT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setrect // ========== EDIT_SETRECT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetRect(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETRECT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETRECTNOPAINT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control. This macro is equivalent to Edit_SetRect, except that it does not redraw the edit control window. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECTNP message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetRectNoPaint() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setrectnopaint(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) { // ========== EDIT_SETRECTNOPAINT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the formatting rectangle of a multiline edit control. This macro is equivalent to Edit_SetRect, except that it does not redraw the edit control window. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETRECTNP message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetRectNoPaint( // hwndCtl, // lprc // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetRectNoPaint( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lprc // RECT* lprc - A pointer to a RECT structure that specifies the dimensions of the rectangle. If this parameter is NULL, the formatting rectangle is set to its default values. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // Rich Edit 3.0 and later. This macro does not have full functionality, because it does not set the WPARAM of the message. // For more information, see EM_SETRECTNP. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setrectnopaint // ========== EDIT_SETRECTNOPAINT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetRectNoPaint(HWND hwndCtl, RECT* lprc) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETRECTNOPAINT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Selects a range of characters in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setsel(HWND hwndCtl, int ichStart, int ichEnd) { // ========== EDIT_SETSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Selects a range of characters in an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetSel( // hwndCtl, // ichStart, // ichEnd // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetSel( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ichStart, // int ichStart - The starting character position of the selection. ichEnd // int ichEnd - The ending character position of the selection. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETSEL. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setsel // ========== EDIT_SETSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetSel(HWND hwndCtl, int ichStart, int ichEnd) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETTABSTOPS // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the tab stops in a multiline edit or rich edit control. When text is copied to the control, any tab character in the text causes space to be generated up to the next tab stop. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetTabStops() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_settabstops(HWND hwndCtl, int cTabs, int* lpTabs) { // ========== EDIT_SETTABSTOPS - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the tab stops in a multiline edit or rich edit control. When text is copied to the control, any tab character in the text causes space to be generated up to the next tab stop. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetTabStops( // hwndCtl, // cTabs, // lpTabs // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetTabStops( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cTabs, // int cTabs - The number of tab stops contained in the array. If this parameter is zero, the lpTabs parameter is ignored and default tab stops are set at every 32 dialog template units. If this parameter is 1, tab stops are set at every n dialog template units, where n is the distance pointed to by the lpTabs parameter. If this parameter is greater than 1, lpTabs is a pointer to an array of tab stops. lpTabs // int* lpTabs - A pointer to an array of unsigned integers specifying the tab stops, in dialog template units. If cTabs is 1, this parameter is a pointer to an unsigned integer containing the distance between all tab stops, in dialog template units. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETTABSTOPS. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_settabstops // ========== EDIT_SETTABSTOPS - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetTabStops(HWND hwndCtl, int cTabs, int* lpTabs) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETTABSTOPS // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the text of an edit control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) { // ========== EDIT_SETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the text of an edit control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetText( // hwndCtl, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpsz // LPTSTR lpsz - A pointer to a null-terminated string to be set as the text in the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to SetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_settext // ========== EDIT_SETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETWORDBREAKPROC // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Replaces an edit control's default Wordwrap function with an application-defined Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_SetWordBreakProc() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_setwordbreakproc(HWND hwndCtl, EDITWORDBREAKPROC lpfnWordBreak) { // ========== EDIT_SETWORDBREAKPROC - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Replaces an edit control's default Wordwrap function with an application-defined Wordwrap function. You can use this macro or send the EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_SetWordBreakProc( // hwndCtl, // lpfnWordBreak // ); // ===== CODE Edit_SetWordBreakProc( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpfnWordBreak // EDITWORDBREAKPROC lpfnWordBreak - The address of the application-defined Wordwrap function. For more information about breaking lines, see the description of the EditWordBreakProc callback function. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_SETWORDBREAKPROC. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_setwordbreakproc // ========== EDIT_SETWORDBREAKPROC - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_SetWordBreakProc(HWND hwndCtl, EDITWORDBREAKPROC lpfnWordBreak) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_SETWORDBREAKPROC // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_UNDO // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Undoes the last operation in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_UNDO message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Edit_Undo() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_edit_undo(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== EDIT_UNDO - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Undoes the last operation in the undo queue of an edit or rich edit control. You can use this macro or send the EM_UNDO message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Edit_Undo( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Edit_Undo( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see EM_UNDO. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-21) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-edit_undo // ========== EDIT_UNDO - END // SYNTAX: // void Edit_Undo(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_EDIT_UNDO // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_GET_X_LPARAM // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the signed x-coordinate from the specified LPARAM value. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // GET_X_LPARAM() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_get_x_lparam(LPARAM lp) { // ========== GET_X_LPARAM - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the signed x-coordinate from the specified LPARAM value. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows 2000 Professional [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows 2000 Server [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h (include Windowsx.h) // ===== SYNTAX // void GET_X_LPARAM( // lp // ); // ===== CODE GET_X_LPARAM( lp // LPARAM lp - The data from which the x-coordinate is to be extracted. ); // Return value // Type: int // X-coordinate. // // Remarks // Use GET_X_LPARAM instead of LOWORD to extract signed coordinate data. Negative screen coordinates may be returned on multiple monitor systems. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-get_x_lparam // ========== GET_X_LPARAM - END // SYNTAX: // void GET_X_LPARAM(LPARAM lp) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_GET_X_LPARAM // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_GET_Y_LPARAM // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the signed y-coordinate from the given LPARAM value. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // GET_Y_LPARAM() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_get_y_lparam(LPARAM lp) { // ========== GET_Y_LPARAM - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the signed y-coordinate from the given LPARAM value. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows 2000 Professional [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows 2000 Server [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h (include Windowsx.h) // ===== SYNTAX // void GET_Y_LPARAM( // lp // ); // ===== CODE GET_Y_LPARAM( lp // LPARAM lp - The data from which the y-coordinate is to be extracted. ); // Return value // Type: int // Y-coordinate. // // Remarks // Use GET_Y_LPARAM instead of HIWORD to extract signed coordinate data. Negative screen coordinates may be returned on multiple monitor systems. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-get_y_lparam // ========== GET_Y_LPARAM - END // SYNTAX: // void GET_Y_LPARAM(LPARAM lp) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_GET_Y_LPARAM // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ADDITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds item data to the list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_AddItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_additemdata(HWND hwndCtl, LPARAM data) { // ========== LISTBOX_ADDITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds item data to the list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_AddItemData( // hwndCtl, // data // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_AddItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. data // LPARAM data - A pointer to the item data to add. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // Use this macro for a list box with an owner-drawn style but without the LBS_HASSTRINGS style. For more information, see LB_ADDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_additemdata // ========== LISTBOX_ADDITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_AddItemData(HWND hwndCtl, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ADDITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ADDSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list box. If the list box does not have the LBS_SORT style, the string is added to the end of the list. Otherwise, the string is inserted into the list and the list is sorted. You can use this macro or send the LB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_AddString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_addstring(HWND hwndCtl, LPCSTR lpsz) { // ========== LISTBOX_ADDSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list box. If the list box does not have the LBS_SORT style, the string is added to the end of the list. Otherwise, the string is inserted into the list and the list is sorted. You can use this macro or send the LB_ADDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_AddString( // hwndCtl, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_AddString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpsz // LPCSTR lpsz - The string to add. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_ADDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_addstring // ========== LISTBOX_ADDSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_AddString(HWND hwndCtl, LPCSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ADDSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_DELETESTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Deletes the item at the specified location in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_DeleteString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_deletestring(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_DELETESTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Deletes the item at the specified location in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_DELETESTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_DeleteString( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_DeleteString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item to delete. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_DELETESTRING // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_deletestring // ========== LISTBOX_DELETESTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_DeleteString(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_DELETESTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_DIR // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds names to the list displayed by a list box. The macro adds the names of directories and files that match a specified string and set of file attributes. It can also add mapped drive letters to the list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_DIR message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_Dir() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_dir(HWND hwndCtl, UINT attrs, LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec) { // ========== LISTBOX_DIR - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds names to the list displayed by a list box. The macro adds the names of directories and files that match a specified string and set of file attributes. It can also add mapped drive letters to the list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_DIR message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_Dir( // hwndCtl, // attrs, // lpszFileSpec // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_Dir( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. attrs, // UINT attrs - The attributes of the files or directories to be added to the list box. For more information, see LB_DIR. lpszFileSpec // LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec - A pointer to the null-terminated string that specifies an absolute path, relative path, or filename. An absolute path can begin with a drive letter (for example, d:) or a UNC name (for example, \ machinename\ sharename). ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_DIR. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_dir // ========== LISTBOX_DIR - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_Dir(HWND hwndCtl, UINT attrs, LPCTSTR lpszFileSpec) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_DIR // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ENABLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Enables or disables a list box control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) { // ========== LISTBOX_ENABLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Enables or disables a list box control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_Enable( // hwndCtl, // fEnable // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_Enable( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fEnable // BOOL fEnable - TRUE to enable the control, or FALSE to disable it. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_enable // ========== LISTBOX_ENABLE - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_Enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_ENABLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Finds the first item in a list box that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_FindItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_finditemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) { // ========== LISTBOX_FINDITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Finds the first item in a list box that has the specified item data. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_FindItemData( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // data // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_FindItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list box, it continues searching from the top of the list box back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list box is searched from the beginning. data // LPARAM data - The data to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_FINDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_finditemdata // ========== LISTBOX_FINDITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_FindItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Finds the first string in a list box that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_FindString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_findstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) { // ========== LISTBOX_FINDSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Finds the first string in a list box that begins with the specified string. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_FindString( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // lpszFind // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_FindString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list box, it continues searching from the top of the list box back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list box is searched from the beginning. lpszFind // LPCTSTR lpszFind - The string to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_FINDSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_findstring // ========== LISTBOX_FINDSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_FindString(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Finds the first list box string that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_FindStringExact() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_findstringexact(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) { // ========== LISTBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Finds the first list box string that exactly matches the specified string, except that the search is not case sensitive. You can use this macro or send the LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_FindStringExact( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // lpszFind // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_FindStringExact( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list box, it continues searching from the top of the list box back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list box is searched from the beginning. lpszFind // LPCTSTR lpszFind - The string to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_FINDSTRINGEXACT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_findstringexact // ========== LISTBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_FindStringExact(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_FINDSTRINGEXACT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCARETINDEX // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the index of the list box item that has the focus rectangle in a multiple-selection list box. The item may or may not be selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetCaretIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getcaretindex(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETCARETINDEX - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the index of the list box item that has the focus rectangle in a multiple-selection list box. The item may or may not be selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetCaretIndex( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetCaretIndex( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The contents of the list box are scrolled till the item is fully visible. // For more information, see LB_GETCARETINDEX. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getcaretindex // ========== LISTBOX_GETCARETINDEX - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetCaretIndex(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCARETINDEX // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCOUNT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of items in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getcount(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETCOUNT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of items in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCOUNT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetCount( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetCount( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getcount // ========== LISTBOX_GETCOUNT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetCount(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCOUNT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCURSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the index of the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getcursel(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETCURSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the index of the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETCURSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetCurSel( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetCurSel( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETCURSEL. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getcursel // ========== LISTBOX_GETCURSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetCurSel(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETCURSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the width that a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width) if the list box has a horizontal scroll bar. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gethorizontalextent(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the width that a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width) if the list box has a horizontal scroll bar. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_gethorizontalextent // ========== LISTBOX_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetHorizontalExtent(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETHORIZONTALEXTENT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetItemData( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getitemdata // ========== LISTBOX_GETITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the height of items in a list box. If the list box has the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, this macro gets the height of the specified item; otherwise, it gets the height of all items. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getitemheight(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the height of items in a list box. If the list box has the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, this macro gets the height of the specified item; otherwise, it gets the height of all items. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetItemHeight( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetItemHeight( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. If the list box does not have the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, set this parameter to zero. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETITEMHEIGHT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getitemheight // ========== LISTBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetItemHeight(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMRECT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the dimensions of the rectangle that bounds a list box item as it is currently displayed in the list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetItemRect() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getitemrect(HWND hwndCtl, int index, RECT* lprc) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETITEMRECT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the dimensions of the rectangle that bounds a list box item as it is currently displayed in the list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETITEMRECT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetItemRect( // hwndCtl, // index, // lprc // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetItemRect( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index of the item in the list box. lprc // RECT* lprc - A pointer to a RECT structure that receives the client coordinates for the item in the list box. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getitemrect // ========== LISTBOX_GETITEMRECT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetItemRect(HWND hwndCtl, int index, RECT* lprc) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETITEMRECT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the selection state of an item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getsel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the selection state of an item. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetSel( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetSel( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETSEL // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getsel // ========== LISTBOX_GETSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetSel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSELCOUNT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the count of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELCOUNT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetSelCount() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getselcount(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETSELCOUNT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the count of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELCOUNT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetSelCount( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetSelCount( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETSELCOUNT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getselcount // ========== LISTBOX_GETSELCOUNT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetSelCount(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSELCOUNT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSELITEMS // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the indexes of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELITEMS message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetSelItems() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_getselitems(HWND hwndCtl, int cItems, int* lpItems) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETSELITEMS - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the indexes of selected items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETSELITEMS message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetSelItems( // hwndCtl, // cItems, // lpItems // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetSelItems( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cItems, // int cItems - The maximum number of selected items whose item numbers are to be placed in the buffer. lpItems // int* lpItems - A pointer to a buffer large enough for the number of integers specified by cItems. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_getselitems // ========== LISTBOX_GETSELITEMS - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetSelItems(HWND hwndCtl, int cItems, int* lpItems) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETSELITEMS // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets a string from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCTSTR lpszBuffer) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets a string from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetText( // hwndCtl, // index, // lpszBuffer // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index of the item. lpszBuffer // LPCTSTR lpszBuffer - A pointer to the buffer that will receive the string. The buffer must have sufficient space for the string and a terminating null character. Before allocating the buffer, you can call ListBox_GetTextLen to retrieve the length of the string. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETTEXT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_gettext // ========== LISTBOX_GETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetText(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCTSTR lpszBuffer) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTEXTLEN // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the length of a string in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetTextLen() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gettextlen(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETTEXTLEN - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the length of a string in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTEXTLEN message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetTextLen( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetTextLen( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_GETTEXTLEN. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_gettextlen // ========== LISTBOX_GETTEXTLEN - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetTextLen(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTEXTLEN // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTOPINDEX // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the index of the first visible item in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_GetTopIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_gettopindex(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_GETTOPINDEX - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the index of the first visible item in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_GETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_GetTopIndex( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_GetTopIndex( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_gettopindex // ========== LISTBOX_GETTOPINDEX - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_GetTopIndex(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_GETTOPINDEX // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_INSERTITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Inserts item data to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_InsertItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_insertitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) { // ========== LISTBOX_INSERTITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Inserts item data to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_InsertItemData( // hwndCtl, // index, // data // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_InsertItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index in the list at which to insert the item data, or –1 to add it to the end of the list. data // LPARAM data - A pointer to the item data to insert. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // Use this macro for a list box with an owner-drawn style but without the LBS_HASSTRINGS style. For more information, see LB_INSERTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_insertitemdata // ========== LISTBOX_INSERTITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_InsertItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_INSERTITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_INSERTSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_InsertString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_insertstring(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCSTR lpsz) { // ========== LISTBOX_INSERTSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Adds a string to a list box at the specified location. You can use this macro or send the LB_INSERTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_InsertString( // hwndCtl, // index, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_InsertString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index at which to insert the string, or –1 to add it to the end of the list. lpsz // LPCSTR lpsz - The string to add. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_INSERTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_insertstring // ========== LISTBOX_INSERTSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_InsertString(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPCSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_INSERTSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_RESETCONTENT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Removes all items from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_ResetContent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_resetcontent(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== LISTBOX_RESETCONTENT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Removes all items from a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_RESETCONTENT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_ResetContent( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_ResetContent( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_resetcontent // ========== LISTBOX_RESETCONTENT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_ResetContent(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_RESETCONTENT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELECTITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Searches a list box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SelectItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_selectitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) { // ========== LISTBOX_SELECTITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Searches a list box for an item that has the specified item data. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SelectItemData( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // data // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SelectItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list box, it continues searching from the top of the list box back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list box is searched from the beginning. data // LPARAM data - The item data to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SELECTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_selectitemdata // ========== LISTBOX_SELECTITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SelectItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELECTITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELECTSTRING // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Searches a list box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SelectString() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_selectstring(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) { // ========== LISTBOX_SELECTSTRING - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Searches a list box for an item that begins with the characters in a specified string. If a matching item is found, the item is selected. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELECTSTRING message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SelectString( // hwndCtl, // indexStart, // lpszFind // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SelectString( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexStart, // int indexStart - The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. When the search reaches the bottom of the list box, it continues searching from the top of the list box back to the item specified by the indexStart parameter. If indexStart is –1, the entire list box is searched from the beginning. lpszFind // LPCTSTR lpszFind - The string to find. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SELECTSTRING. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_selectstring // ========== LISTBOX_SELECTSTRING - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SelectString(HWND hwndCtl, int indexStart, LPCTSTR lpszFind) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELECTSTRING // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELITEMRANGE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Selects or deselects one or more consecutive items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELITEMRANGE message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SelItemRange() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_selitemrange(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fSelect, int first, int last) { // ========== LISTBOX_SELITEMRANGE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Selects or deselects one or more consecutive items in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SELITEMRANGE message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SelItemRange( // hwndCtl, // fSelect, // first, // last // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SelItemRange( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fSelect, // BOOL fSelect - TRUE to select the range of items, or FALSE to deselect it. first, // int first - The zero-based index of the first item to select. last // int last - The zero-based index of the last item to select. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_selitemrange // ========== LISTBOX_SELITEMRANGE - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SelItemRange(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fSelect, int first, int last) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SELITEMRANGE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCARETINDEX // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the focus rectangle to the item at the specified index in a multiple-selection list box. If the item is not visible, it is scrolled into view. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetCaretIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setcaretindex(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETCARETINDEX - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the focus rectangle to the item at the specified index in a multiple-selection list box. If the item is not visible, it is scrolled into view. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCARETINDEX message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetCaretIndex( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetCaretIndex( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - the zero-based index of the list box item that is to receive the focus rectangle. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The contents of the list box are scrolled till the item is fully visible. // For more information, see LB_SETCARETINDEX. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_setcaretindex // ========== LISTBOX_SETCARETINDEX - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetCaretIndex(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCARETINDEX // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCOLUMNWIDTH // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the width of all columns in a multiple-column list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetColumnWidth() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setcolumnwidth(HWND hwndCtl, int cxColumn) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETCOLUMNWIDTH - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the width of all columns in a multiple-column list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCOLUMNWIDTH message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetColumnWidth( // hwndCtl, // cxColumn // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetColumnWidth( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cxColumn // int cxColumn - The width, in pixels, of all columns. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_setcolumnwidth // ========== LISTBOX_SETCOLUMNWIDTH - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetColumnWidth(HWND hwndCtl, int cxColumn) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCOLUMNWIDTH // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCURSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetCurSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setcursel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETCURSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the currently selected item in a single-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETCURSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetCurSel( // hwndCtl, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetCurSel( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item to select, or –1 to clear the selection. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SETCURSEL. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_setcursel // ========== LISTBOX_SETCURSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetCurSel(HWND hwndCtl, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETCURSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Set the width by which a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width). If the width of the list box is smaller than this value, the horizontal scroll bar horizontally scrolls items in the list box. If the width of the list box is equal to or greater than this value, the horizontal scroll bar is hidden. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_sethorizontalextent(HWND hwndCtl, int cxExtent) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Set the width by which a list box can be scrolled horizontally (the scrollable width). If the width of the list box is smaller than this value, the horizontal scroll bar horizontally scrolls items in the list box. If the width of the list box is equal to or greater than this value, the horizontal scroll bar is hidden. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent( // hwndCtl, // cxExtent // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cxExtent // int cxExtent - The number of pixels by which the list box can be scrolled. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_sethorizontalextent // ========== LISTBOX_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetHorizontalExtent(HWND hwndCtl, int cxExtent) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETHORIZONTALEXTENT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETITEMDATA // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetItemData() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setitemdata(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETITEMDATA - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the application-defined value associated with the specified list box item. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETITEMDATA message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetItemData( // hwndCtl, // index, // data // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetItemData( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index of the item. data // LPARAM data - The item data to set. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SETITEMDATA. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_setitemdata // ========== LISTBOX_SETITEMDATA - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetItemData(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM data) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETITEMDATA // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the height of items in a list box. If the list box has the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, this macro sets the height of the specified item; otherwise, it sets the height of all items. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetItemHeight() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setitemheight(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM cy) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the height of items in a list box. If the list box has the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, this macro sets the height of the specified item; otherwise, it sets the height of all items. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETITEMHEIGHT message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetItemHeight( // hwndCtl, // index, // cy // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetItemHeight( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. index, // int index - The zero-based index of the item. If the list box does not have the LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE style, set this parameter to zero. cy // LPARAM cy - The height of the item or items, in pixels. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SETITEMHEIGHT. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_setitemheight // ========== LISTBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetItemHeight(HWND hwndCtl, int index, LPARAM cy) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETITEMHEIGHT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETSEL // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Selects or deselects an item in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETSEL message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetSel() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_setsel(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fSelect, int index) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETSEL - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Selects or deselects an item in a multiple-selection list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETSEL message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetSel( // hwndCtl, // fSelect, // index // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetSel( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fSelect, // BOOL fSelect - TRUE to select the item, or FALSE to deselect it. index // int index - The zero-based index of the item. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_setsel // ========== LISTBOX_SETSEL - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetSel(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fSelect, int index) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETSEL // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETTABSTOPS // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the tab-stop positions in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetTabStops() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_settabstops(HWND hwndCtl, int cTabs, int* lpTabs) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETTABSTOPS - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the tab-stop positions in a list box. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTABSTOPS message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetTabStops( // hwndCtl, // cTabs, // lpTabs // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetTabStops( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. cTabs, // int cTabs - The number of elements in the lpTabs array. lpTabs // int* lpTabs - A pointer to an array of integers containing the tab stops. The integers represent the number of quarters of the average character width for the font that is selected into the list box. For example, a tab stop of 4 is placed at 1.0 character units, and a tab stop of 6 is placed at 1.5 average character units. However, if the list box is part of a dialog box, the integers are in dialog template units. The tab stops must be sorted in ascending order; backward tabs are not allowed. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see LB_SETTABSTOPS. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_settabstops // ========== LISTBOX_SETTABSTOPS - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetTabStops(HWND hwndCtl, int cTabs, int* lpTabs) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETTABSTOPS // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETTOPINDEX // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Ensures that the specified item in a list box is visible. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ListBox_SetTopIndex() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_listbox_settopindex(HWND hwndCtl, int indexTop) { // ========== LISTBOX_SETTOPINDEX - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Ensures that the specified item in a list box is visible. You can use this macro or send the LB_SETTOPINDEX message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ListBox_SetTopIndex( // hwndCtl, // indexTop // ); // ===== CODE ListBox_SetTopIndex( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. indexTop // int indexTop - The zero-based index of the item to put at the top of the visible part of the list. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The list box contents are scrolled so that either the specified item appears at the top of the list box or the maximum scroll range has been reached. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-listbox_settopindex // ========== LISTBOX_SETTOPINDEX - END // SYNTAX: // void ListBox_SetTopIndex(HWND hwndCtl, int indexTop) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_LISTBOX_SETTOPINDEX // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_ENABLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Enables or disables a scroll bar control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ScrollBar_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_enable(HWND hwndCtl, UINT flags) { // ========== SCROLLBAR_ENABLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Enables or disables a scroll bar control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ScrollBar_Enable( // hwndCtl, // flags // ); // ===== CODE ScrollBar_Enable( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. flags // UINT flags - Flags that specify the arrows affected and whether they are enabled or disabled. See the wArrows parameter of EnableScrollBar for more information. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to EnableScrollBar with SB_CTL in the wSBFlags parameter. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-scrollbar_enable // ========== SCROLLBAR_ENABLE - END // SYNTAX: // void ScrollBar_Enable(HWND hwndCtl, UINT flags) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_ENABLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_GETPOS // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the GetScrollPos function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the GetScrollInfo function. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ScrollBar_GetPos() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_getpos(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== SCROLLBAR_GETPOS - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the GetScrollPos function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the GetScrollInfo function. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ScrollBar_GetPos( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE ScrollBar_GetPos( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see GetScrollInfo. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-scrollbar_getpos // ========== SCROLLBAR_GETPOS - END // SYNTAX: // void ScrollBar_GetPos(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_GETPOS // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_GETRANGE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the range of a scroll bar. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the GetScrollRange function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the GetScrollInfo function. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ScrollBar_GetRange() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_getrange(HWND hwndCtl, int* lpposMin, int* lpposMax) { // ========== SCROLLBAR_GETRANGE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the range of a scroll bar. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the GetScrollRange function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the GetScrollInfo function. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ScrollBar_GetRange( // hwndCtl, // lpposMin, // lpposMax // ); // ===== CODE ScrollBar_GetRange( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpposMin, // int* lpposMin - Address of a variable that receives the minimum value of the scroll bar. lpposMax // int* lpposMax - Address of a variable that receives the maximum value of the scroll bar. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see GetScrollRange. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-scrollbar_getrange // ========== SCROLLBAR_GETRANGE - END // SYNTAX: // void ScrollBar_GetRange(HWND hwndCtl, int* lpposMin, int* lpposMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_GETRANGE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SETPOS // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar and, if requested, redraws the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the SetScrollPos function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the SetScrollInfo function. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ScrollBar_SetPos() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_setpos(HWND hwndCtl, int pos, BOOL fRedraw) { // ========== SCROLLBAR_SETPOS - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the position of the scroll box (thumb) in the specified scroll bar and, if requested, redraws the scroll bar to reflect the new position of the scroll box. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the SetScrollPos function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the SetScrollInfo function. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ScrollBar_SetPos( // hwndCtl, // pos, // fRedraw // ); // ===== CODE ScrollBar_SetPos( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. pos, // int pos - The new position of the scroll box. fRedraw // BOOL fRedraw - TRUE to redraw the control; otherwise FALSE. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-scrollbar_setpos // ========== SCROLLBAR_SETPOS - END // SYNTAX: // void ScrollBar_SetPos(HWND hwndCtl, int pos, BOOL fRedraw) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SETPOS // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SETRANGE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the range of a scroll bar. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the SetScrollRange function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the SetScrollInfo function. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ScrollBar_SetRange() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_setrange(HWND hwndCtl, int posMin, int posMax, BOOL fRedraw) { // ========== SCROLLBAR_SETRANGE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the range of a scroll bar. // Note: This macro expands to a call to the SetScrollRange function, which is deprecated. New applications should use the SetScrollInfo function. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ScrollBar_SetRange( // hwndCtl, // posMin, // posMax, // fRedraw // ); // ===== CODE ScrollBar_SetRange( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. posMin, // int posMin - The minimum value of the scroll bar. posMax, // int posMax - The maximum value of the scroll bar. fRedraw // BOOL fRedraw - TRUE to redraw the control; otherwise FALSE. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // For more information, see SetScrollRange. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-scrollbar_setrange // ========== SCROLLBAR_SETRANGE - END // SYNTAX: // void ScrollBar_SetRange(HWND hwndCtl, int posMin, int posMax, BOOL fRedraw) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SETRANGE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SHOW // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Shows or hides a scroll bar control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // ScrollBar_Show() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_scrollbar_show(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fShow) { // ========== SCROLLBAR_SHOW - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Shows or hides a scroll bar control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void ScrollBar_Show( // hwndCtl, // fShow // ); // ===== CODE ScrollBar_Show( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fShow // BOOL fShow - TRUE to show the control, or FALSE to hide it. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-scrollbar_show // ========== SCROLLBAR_SHOW - END // SYNTAX: // void ScrollBar_Show(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fShow) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SCROLLBAR_SHOW // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SELECTFONT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // The SelectFont macro selects a font object into the specified device context (DC). The new font object replaces the previous font object. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // SelectFont() - Windows_2000_Professional, Windows_2000_Server | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_selectfont(HDC hdc, HFONT hfont) { // ========== SELECTFONT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // The SelectFont macro selects a font object into the specified device context (DC). The new font object replaces the previous font object. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows 2000 Professional [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows 2000 Server [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void SelectFont( // hdc, // hfont // ); // ===== CODE SelectFont( hdc, // HDC hdc - A handle to the DC. hfont // HFONT hfont - A handle to the font object to be selected. The font object must have been created using either CreateFont or CreateFontIndirect. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // After an application has finished drawing with the new font object, it should always replace a new font object with the original font object. // The SelectFont macro is equivalent to calling SelectObject as follows: // [syntax] // ((HFONT) SelectObject((hdc), (HGDIOBJ)(HFONT)(hfont))) // [/syntax] // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-selectfont // ========== SELECTFONT - END // SYNTAX: // void SelectFont(HDC hdc, HFONT hfont) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_SELECTFONT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_ENABLE // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Enables or disables a static control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Static_Enable() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) { // ========== STATIC_ENABLE - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Enables or disables a static control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Static_Enable( // hwndCtl, // fEnable // ); // ===== CODE Static_Enable( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. fEnable // BOOL fEnable - TRUE to enable the static control, or FALSE to disable it. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-static_enable // ========== STATIC_ENABLE - END // SYNTAX: // void Static_Enable(HWND hwndCtl, BOOL fEnable) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_ENABLE // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETICON // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Retrieves a handle to the icon associated with a static control that has the SS_ICON style. You can use this macro or send the STM_GETICON message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Static_GetIcon() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_geticon(HWND hwndCtl, HICON hIcon) { // ========== STATIC_GETICON - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Retrieves a handle to the icon associated with a static control that has the SS_ICON style. You can use this macro or send the STM_GETICON message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Static_GetIcon( // hwndCtl, // hIcon // ); // ===== CODE Static_GetIcon( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. hIcon // HICON hIcon - A handle to the icon. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-static_geticon // ========== STATIC_GETICON - END // SYNTAX: // void Static_GetIcon(HWND hwndCtl, HICON hIcon) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETICON // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the text of a static control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Static_GetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_gettext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) { // ========== STATIC_GETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the text of a static control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Static_GetText( // hwndCtl, // lpch, // cchMax // ); // ===== CODE Static_GetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpch, // LPTSTR lpch - A pointer to the buffer that will receive the text. cchMax // int cchMax - The maximum number of characters to copy to the buffer, including the NULL terminator. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-static_gettext // ========== STATIC_GETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Static_GetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpch, int cchMax) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of a static control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Static_GetTextLength() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_gettextlength(HWND hwndCtl) { // ========== STATIC_GETTEXTLENGTH - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Gets the number of characters in the text of a static control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Static_GetTextLength( // hwndCtl // ); // ===== CODE Static_GetTextLength( hwndCtl // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to GetWindowTextLength. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-static_gettextlength // ========== STATIC_GETTEXTLENGTH - END // SYNTAX: // void Static_GetTextLength(HWND hwndCtl) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_GETTEXTLENGTH // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_SETICON // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the icon for a static control. You can use this macro or send the STM_SETICON message explicitly. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Static_SetIcon() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_seticon(HWND hwndCtl, HICON hIcon) { // ========== STATIC_SETICON - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the icon for a static control. You can use this macro or send the STM_SETICON message explicitly. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Static_SetIcon( // hwndCtl, // hIcon // ); // ===== CODE Static_SetIcon( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. hIcon // HICON hIcon - a handle to the icon. ); // Return value // None // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-static_seticon // ========== STATIC_SETICON - END // SYNTAX: // void Static_SetIcon(HWND hwndCtl, HICON hIcon) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_SETICON // ============================== // ============================== BEGIN // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_SETTEXT // ============================== PUBLIC // ============================== ABOUT // Sets the text of a static control. // ============================== MINIMUM_SUPPORT // Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 // ============================== USING HEADERS (1) // windowsx_h // ============================== USING FUNCTIONS (1) // Static_SetText() - Windows_Vista, Windows_Server_2003 | windowsx_h // ============================== CODE void cpp_windows_win32_api_windowsx_static_settext(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) { // ========== STATIC_SETTEXT - BEGIN // ===== ABOUT // Sets the text of a static control. // ===== DESCRIPTION // ===== SUPPORTED // Requirement - Value // Minimum supported client - Windows Vista [desktop apps only] // Minimum supported server - Windows Server 2003 [desktop apps only] // Target Platform - Windows // Header - windowsx.h // ===== SYNTAX // void Static_SetText( // hwndCtl, // lpsz // ); // ===== CODE Static_SetText( hwndCtl, // HWND hwndCtl - A handle to the control. lpsz // LPTSTR lpsz - A pointer to a null-terminated string to be used as the static control text. ); // Return value // None // // Remarks // The macro expands to a call to SetWindowText. // ===== LITERATURE_SOURCES // * MICROSOFT_COM (2024-04-22) // URL: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/windowsx/nf-windowsx-static_settext // ========== STATIC_SETTEXT - END // SYNTAX: // void Static_SetText(HWND hwndCtl, LPTSTR lpsz) // return: void } // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX_STATIC_SETTEXT // ============================== // ============================== END // CPP_WINDOWS_WIN32_API_WINDOWSX // ==============================